Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout7831 RUSH ROSE DR; BLDG E; FA060088; Permit6/14/22, 2:27 PM FA060088 Permit Data City of Carlsbad Fire Alarm Permit Permit No: FA060088 7831 RUSH ROSE Job Address: Status: ISSUED DR Permit Type: FALARM Applied 12/20/2006 Parcel No: Approved: 12/20/2006 Lot #: 0 Reference No.: Issued: 12/20/2006 PC #: Inspector: Project Title: LA COSTA GLEN, "E" TWO FIRE ALARM INSPECTIONS @ $62/EA Applicant: Owner: DIALCOM SYSTEM SERVICES 1541 SIMPSON WAY ESCONDIDO, CA 760-233-9787 Fees ($) Add'l Fees ($) Total ($) Balance ($) 124 , 0 124 0 1/1 La Costa Glen, Phase 4 - Bldgs E-F-G-H & Recreation Review Comments. Page 2 Review Comments La Costa Glen, Phase 4 - Bldgs E-F-G-H & Recreation, Rush Rose Drive, Carlsbad, California Building E Sheet FA 102, bedroom #PO 114 is missing the required audible notification device. Field verify that the proper device, similar to those found in adjacent bedrooms, is installed. No resubmittal required. Alarm current for 3-I 2SG is shown on the catalog data sheets as 7 mA, while calculations use value of 20 mA. No revision required. Alarm current for 3MODCOM is shown on the catalog data sheets as 90 mA, while the calculations show 95 mA. No revision required. It is not possible to verify the current draws for the 3-SAC. Standby current for SIGA-CT is shown on the catalog data sheets as 369ILA and the alarm current is shown as 680A, while the calculations us 22 and 40 respectively. No revision required, as the battery capacity cushion is sufficient to account for the increase in current required. Standby current for SIGA-CCIS is shown on the catalog data sheets as 223 I.LA and the alarm current is shown as 1 00.tA, while the calculations us 250 and 40 respectively. No revision required, as the battery capacity cushion is sufficient to account for the increase in current required. Standby current for SIGA-CR is shown on the catalog data sheets as 100jtA and the alarm current is shown as 100 liA, while the calculations us 10 for each device. Unable to verify current for BPS bA. Recreation Building Provide additional visible notification- devices in pool/spa room, as 110 cd strobes will not provide adequate notification in a public space of this size when both are located on one wall more than 55 feet from the opposite wall. Field verify, and no revision or resubmittal is required. S FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SUBMITTAL for —Y :43f4L-1 BUILDI NG! S Carlsbad CA 9204 0 APPRN OT M—"rz EPIAr C LS PIE -ARTMENT S s c'( ci ( - - - - r ri S ( StB1E C çED submitted by UR OF THE Of 1 DIALCOM SYSTEM SERVICES 1541 Simpson Way Escondido, California 92029 (760) 233-9787 r \rr\ _J - . (L)JJ 2iMiJ.i INSTALLING CONTRACTOR: DIALCOM SYSTEM SERVICES, INC. 1541 Simpson Way Escondido, California 92029 Phone: (760) 233-9787 CONTRACTORS LICENSE: C- 10 #664575, 02/28/07 PROJECT MANAGER: Pete Mallory PROJECT NAME: La Costa Glen 4, Buildings "E,F,G,H,COMMON and REC" PROJECT ADDRESS: Carlsbad, CA. 92010 SCOPE OF WORK: Fire Alarm System S S EI S November 8, 2006 LA COSTA GLEN 4, BUILDING "E,F,G,H, COMMON and REC" CARLSBAD, CA 92010 RE: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Dialcom System Services, Inc. is pleased to submit the following equipment for your approval. All equipment is U.L. approved and California State Fire Marshall listed. The building is 100% sprinklered and monitored. MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION C.S.F.M. EST 3 Control Panel 7170-1657:187 EST LCD LCD, DISPLAY 7170-1657:j87 EST3-CPU3 CENTRAL PROCESSOR MODULE 7170-1657:187 EST 3-FIBMB FIBER CARD 71 70-1 657187 EST3-12SG 12 SWITCHES, 12 GM LED CTRL. DIS. MOD 7170-1657:187 EST 3-RS232 COMMUNICATION CARD 7170-1657:187 EST 3-SDDC1 SIGNATURE DUAL DRIVER 7170-1657:187 EST 3-MODCOM MODEM COMMUNICATOR 7170-1657:187 EST 3-SAC SECURITY ACCESS MODULE 7170-1657:187 EST 3-PPS/M PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY 7170-1657:187 EST-3-CHAS7 CHASSIS ASSY 7170-1657:187 EST-3-CAB713 BACK BOX 7170-1657:187 EST-3-BBC/M BOOSTER PWR. SUPPLY 7170-1657:187 EST3-RCC7R BATTERY CABINET, RED 7170-1657:187 EST-1 2V50A BATTERY 50AH, 1 2VOLT EST-3-BTSEN BATTERY SHELF 7170-1657:187 EST-BATS BATTERY SHELF, SINGLE 7170-1657:187 EST-3-LCDANN ANNUNCIATOR MODULE 7120-1657:198 EST-RLCM/B FLUSH BOX 7170-1657:187 EST-3-PPS/M PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY - 7170-1657:187 EST-3-LRMF BLANK LRM FILLER 7170-1657:187 EST-3-CAB5 COMPLETE CABINET 7170-1657:187 EST-BC-1 BATTERY CABINET 7170-1657:187 EST-1 2V 40A BATTERY 40AH, 12 VOLT EST-13PS10A REMOTE BOOSTER PWR. SUPPLY 7300-1657:229 EST-SIGA-PHS 3D MULTISENSOR 7272-1657:126 MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION C.S.F.M. • EST-SIGA-SB4 DETECTOR BASE 7300-1657:120 EST-SIGA-WTM WATERFLOW MODULE 7300-1657:121 EST-SIGA-CT1 SINGLE INPUT MODULE 7300-1657:121 EST-SIGA-CT2 DUAL INPUT MODULE 7300-1657:121 EST-SIGA-CC'lS SYNCH RELAY MODULE 7300-1657:121 EST-SIGA-CR CONTROL RELAY MODULE 7300-1657:121 EST-G1F-VM STROBE 7125-1657:203 EST-G1F-HD MINI HORN 7125-1657:202 EST-G 1 F-HDVM HORN/STROBE MULTI-CANDELA 7125-1657:202 EST-SIGA-SD DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR 3240-1657:224 EST-SD-T1 20 120" AIR SAMPLING TUBE 3240-1657:108 EST-CRC CARD READER CONTROLLER EST-tR5395 CARD READER EST-05395BL CARD READER COVERPLATE FATC Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinet UL Listed Coleman Wire, Fire Rated #14/2 FPL 7161-1236:102 • Coleman Wire, Fire Rated #16/2 FFL 7161-1236:102 Respectfully submitted, DIMCOM SYSTEM SERVICES, INC. 0 EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY POWER SUPPLIES S EST3 Power Supplies Models: 3-PPS/M series, 3-13PS/M series, 3-BBcIM series Features High efficiency switch mode ia Increased power distribution efficiency - power supplies parallel allowing up to 28 amps in a single node 120 or 230 Vac operation lAMP filtered and regulated Two 3.5 AMP outputs I Temperature compensated, dual rated battery charger 11 Electronic power limiting U Automatic load testing of batteries Description EST3 Power supplies consist of two assemblies, a high efficiency switch mode power supply card and a power supply monitor module. The monitor module mounts to the local rail and distributes the power from its supply to the local rail. The local rail distributes power from all power supplies to other local rail modules and user interface cards resulting in "Shared Power" throughout the system. By paralleling the power supplies on a rail maximum utilization of available power is possible, resulting in fewer power supplies. Up to four power supplies combine in a single enclosure providing up to 28 amps of available power. Battery backup is provided using from one to four sets of batter- ies, depending on standby power requirements. Power supplies mount to the back of the chassis units or wallboxes. The associated power supply monitor module mounts on the local rail providing system power distribution and mount- ing space for any control display module. Access to auxiliary power is via easily accessible terminal blocks located on the power supply monitor module. Each power supply produces 7 Amps of filtered and regulated power. With four power suppliesli located in an enclosure (one primary and three booster power - supplies) 28 amps of current is available for local rail modure control display modules and the eight auxiliary 3.5 amp power outputs (two per supply). Application The primary power supply provides the system with battery charging and voltage regulation. Software configures the charger to either 10-24 AH batteries or 30-66 AH batteries and controls the high/low charge rates. Batteries mounted in the same enclosure as the power supply, have their charge rate monitored and adjusted based on the local enclosure temperature, keeping charging rates within battery specification. For remote batteries a temperature probe is monitored in the remote battery cabinet and charge rates are adjusted automatically. Battery damage is unlikely to occur when environmental shortterm conditions are outside of normal operating ranges. The EST3 power supplies automatically load test batteries by shutting down the battery charger and placing a load across the battery. If the battery voltage is outside the specification range the power supply reports a trouble. The trouble clears if the battery is able to recover and pass future load tests. Battery leads are electronically short circuit protected. If a short occurs in the battery leads the charger automatically disables itself and causes atroublC. The system will constantly look to see if the shortiiid1ftFiishortcIèàrs the system automatically restores. - During operation on standby batteries, battery voltage is con- - stanttythonitored;:A trouble is reported if the battery voltage falls belowa specified value. - - IESI3power supplies -provide specific information back to the 3- -CPU(t)designed to help speed trouble shooting of system functions. S Ir iIda p -owe riTjplydetecta fault, specific diagnostic -.--.--codes-areivailableto-speedtrouble-shooting.. The [CD will - - diia'j the joèr supplies address, a specific trouble code, and a text message describing the specific trouble. Text messages are easy to understand and include items like: Batterylrouble, Aux Power Overload Circuit 1, Aux Power Overload Circuit 2. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY US. SALES: BRADENTON, FL 888-378-2329; FAX 866Z03—'Q% • CANADA SALES: OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-2430; FAX 519.376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES. 905-270-1711; 905-270-9553 • COORATEHEADOIJART: CHESHIRE, CT US MANUFACTURING: PflTSRELDandNEWPORT ME Issue 8 Literature Sheet #85010-0059 Page 1 of 4 Not to be used for inetailatlon purposes. For the most current literature and updates visit www.est.net. pica Wiring Utility Power I Primary I I Booster I Power l IPowerl Supply J;] Supply J_i Power 24Vdc* 111111 24Vdc Supply IlihI2xa5A I I<ffR2x3.5A Monitoring LLU, Booster Booster Power I Power Supply Supply [2] 11ll.24Vdc W24Vdc* 1 [ffl{2x3.5A 3.5A Primary Rails Power Supply —+ Power Monitor Module II VTo Rail Rails Booster - Power Supply Monitor Module Auxiliary Power Auxiliary Power L"--0- Auxiliary Power Takeoff Takeoff Takeoff 2x3.5A 2x3.5A 2x3.5A From battery temperature probe terminals. From battery and from temperature probe terminals if 3-BTSEN-E used. Nominal Voltage Auxiliary Power Takeoff 2x3.5A Power Supply Rules Each battery set needs one charger, either a 3-PPS/M or a 3-BBC/M. Each power supply must be connected to a battery set using an identical length and gauge of wire to keep voltage drops identical. Distribute power supplies and loads evenly across rails. All battery sets for a panel must be the same capacity (AH), same manufacturer, and same manufacturing date code. The Table below illustrates the combinations of power supplies and batteries that meet all the power supply rules. 24 VDC Power Current 7A 14A I 21A 28A Three iniir Identical Battery One Set, One Set, One SetSets,, Identical One Set. Requirement 65 AH max 65 AH max 65 AH max 65 AH max Sets, 65 AH max 65 AH max 65 AH max Required 1 p si 3- P M 1 3PPS/M 1 3PP5/M 1 3-PPS/M 1 3-PPS/M 1 3PPS/M 1 3-PPS/M Modules 1 3-BPS/! -- 1 3-BBC/M 2 3-13PS/M 2 3-BBC/M 3 3-13PS/M 3 3-BBc/M Engineering Specification The fire alarm power supplies must be capablefbeing paralleled and to load share. Multiple power supplies must be capable of being backed up with a single 24vO1t battery set:Each- power supply shall be capable of charging up to 65 AH.batteries.]lie power supply must be able to performanutomatkIoadtestof batteries and return a trouble iftliébätteriesfalljiitside apredeter i_.i mined range. Power supplies must incorporate the ability to adjust the charge rate of batteries based on ambient temperatures. ltshall .e possible to adjustfor ambient temperature changes in local abinets as well as remote cabinets. - - EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Page 2 of 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0059 Issue 8 Not to be used for installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates visit www.eat.net. Catalog Ship Wt. Number Description lb. (kg) 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply w/ local rail 5(2.3) module _120V_50/60_Hz 3-BPS/M Booster Power Supply w/ local rail 5(2.3) module _120V50/60_Hz 3-PPS/M-230 Primary Power Supply w/ local rail 5(2.3) module _230V_50/60_Hz 3-BPS/M-230 Booster Power Supply w/ local rail 5(2.3) module 230V 50/60 Hz 3-PPS/ Primary Power Supply w/local rail 5(2.3) M-230-E module 230V 50 Hz, EN-54 Certified, CE 3-BPS/ Booster Power Supply w/local rail 5(2.3) M-230-E module 230V 50 Hz, EN-54 Certified, CE 3-BBC/M Booster/Charger Supply w/local rail 5(2.3) module 120V 50/601-lz 3-BBC/M-230 Booster/Charger Supply w/local rail 5(2.3) module _230V50/60Hz 3 BBC/ Booster/Charger Supply w/local rail M-230-E module, 230V 50/60Hz, 5(2.3) EN-54 Certified, CE Booster/Charger Monitor Module 3-BBCMON(-E) with charger capability (upgrade 5 (2.3) 3-BPS/M(-230)(-E) to 3-BBC/M-(230)(-E)) 3-BTSEN Distribution Module required when .5 (.22) battery installed in remote cabinet Distribution and Temperature Sensor 3-BTSEN-E Module. Required in EN-54 Markets when .5 (.22) battery installed in a remote cabinet. / 0 L / 0 I= II I .IJ I Power Power I Distribution I Module (EN-54 only) a a (S Specifications Catalog Number 3-PPS/M a 349BC/M 3-SPS/M 31M0 & 3-BBC/M-230 3-BPS/M-230 I 3-PPS/M-230-E & 3-BBC/M-230-E I 1M Agency Approvals UL, ULC, FM EN-54, LPCB, CE Input Voltage 120 Vac, 50-60 Hz 230 Vac, 50-60 Hz 230 Vac, 501-lz Brownout Level <or = 102 Vac I <or = 195 Vac <or = 195 Vac Input Current 2.OA 1.OA 1.OA Total Output Current 7.0 Amps Battery Charging Capacity 65AH Sealed Lead-Acid None 65AH Sealed Lead-Acid None 30AH Sealed Lead-Acid None Low Battery Trouble 24 Vdc 22.5 Vdc Deep Discharge Cutoff 19.5 Vdc 20.0 Vdc Mounting Requirements One LRM space, One chassis footprint 1 LRM Space + 3-PPS: 2 footprints 3-BBC: 1 footprint One LRM space. J One chassis footprint Output Voltage 24 Vdc Nominal Auxiliary Output Current Two sources of 3.5Amps each taken from total output current Auxiliary Output Terminal Capacity 18 AWG to 12 AWG (1mm2 to 2.5 mm2) Output Protection Electronic power limiting It heat sink temperature Ground Fault Detection 10KOhm Installation and Mounting Ordering Information EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Issue 8 Literature Sheet #85010-0059 Page 3 of 4 Not to be used for installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates visit www.est.net. I I EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We cannot cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact EST. © 2005 EST timti in U.S.A.. (origin) Pegs 4 of 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0059 Issue 7 Not to be used for installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates visit Www.est.net. A product of EST Marketing, Bradenton, FL gineering Specification ie security and access control module shall be capable of supporting 62 devices on two class B circuits or where added reliability is required, 30 devices on a single Class A circuit. It must be possible to wire Class A in Style 6 configuration. The module shall be capable of supporting both fire and security devices on the same circuit The module shall permit total integration of the fire, security and access control functions bythe system. The module shall be <UL> <ULC> listed for both fire-and security applications. Typical Wiring Class A wiring Class B wiring 3-SAC Moi Specifications Agency Listings UL, ULC. See Note 1. Circuit Configuration Class A or Class B Circuit Capacity 30 devices on one Class A circuit, 62 devices on two circuits wired Class B Input Current 40 mA under all conditions Wire Size 22 AWG to 14 AWG (0.25mm2 to 1.5mm2), depending on specifications of connected devices Maximum Line Resistance 90 Ohms Operating Environment 0°C to 49° Complete (32°F to 120°F) @ 85%RH. Non-condensing Mounting One Local Rail Space Note 1: The EST3 is modularly listed under the following standards: UL 864 categories: UOJZ, UOXX, UUKL and SYZV, UL 294 category ALVY, UL 609 category AOTX, UL 636 category ANET, UL 1076 category APOU, UL 365 category APAW, UL 1610 category AMCX, UL 1635 category AMCX ULC-S527, ULC-5301, ULC-S302, ULC-S303, ULC-S304, ULC-S306, ULC/ORD-C1076 and ULC/ORD-C693 Please refer to EST3 Installation and Service Manual for complete system requirements. Ordering Information Catalog Number Description Shipping WI. lb (kg) 3SAC Security/Access Control Module 0.5 (.23) LCD 120 fl terminating Keypad Resistor 120 t) terminating Resistor H 24 I nsl Power Supr Vdc + - CRC CRC 24Vdc 24Vdc * - No Refer to device installation sheets for proper wiring connections. L Maximum of 30 devices (Class A) 62 devices (31 per loop) (Class B). -- Security Access Control Bus Up to 4,000 ft. (1,220 m). All wiring Is power limited and supervised. CRCs require 24Vdc or local transformer for operational power. KPDISP requires 24Vdc for power. Continuity of the minus from the control panel's power supply must be - maintained with all devices communicating with thepanefs3SAC - LCD Keypad Class B wiring showing power cabling control Panel I Power supply 24 Vdc LI KPOISP 24 Vdc fl EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet contact EST S 23 EST Punted in USA ongini Page 2 of 2 Literature Sheet #85010-0109 Issue 4 Not to be used for installation purposes. ,.,ieit *,ww cnct. net A product of EST Marketing, Sarasota, FL Multlingual Supports English, French, Spanish, and Russian I Uses queues to sort events A queue is a list of messages Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and Monitor a Slide in LED and switch labels Makes customization for regional language easy Description The Main Display interface is the primary user interface in the EST3 Life Safety System. The main display interface focuses on the emergency user by putting information important to the user up front. Hands free, the first highest priority event is shown. The display always gives the last highest priority event. Arriving at the panel and without opening the door the first and last alarm is given. Simple to understand lights and switches help the emer- gency user execute system commands with confidence. A menu system supports maintenance functions such as disables or reports for use by staff or service personnel. Application The 3-LCD module mounts to the local rail over the nodes Central Processing Unit Module (3-CPU). The 3-LCD module is optional in any network node. Ensuring information clarity the 3-LCD uses a backlit high contrast supertwist graphical display. Eight lines of 21 characters provide the room needed to convey emergency information in a useful format. The 3-LCD always displays the last highest priority event even- - when the user is viewing other message queues. Further mes- (f initiated at a specific time/shift change. There is no need to have messages display in areas that are not affected by an event The 3-LCD can display messages in English. Spanish, French, and Russian. The bilingual display lets the operator select between either of two languages. Consult your representative for available language combinations. The EST3 system configures for Proprietary, Local or EN54 market operations. The mode of operation is selected through the System Definition Utility (SDU) which may adjust the following operations slightly to fit the system operation selected. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY rM CONTROL AND ANNUNCIATION Liquid Crystal Display Module ,r6iCco F eat U r C S Uses simple lights and switches I Displays information important to user Hands free first alarm display Last event of highest priority always displays I Eight lines by 21 character graphic LCD display —168 characters total About LEDs and Switches Further enhancing the 3-LCD user interface are easy to read and understand lights and switches. All functions are laid out in a logical order. At the top of the 3-LCD are five system status LEDs. Here determining the general condition of the system is easy. 0 0 0 0 0 Power Test CPU Grid Disable Fail Fault Power. LED: Green, on when AC power is on. Test LED: Yellow, on when any portion of the system (Group) is undertest - CPU Fail LED:Yellowon when CPU stops running. Gnd Fault LED YeHow, on when aground exists on the system (group) Disable LEDYellowon when any point or zone is disabled by a user sage flexibility is provided with EST3's message routing ability. o1 I ol I ol I o Messages from a node can display at every node on the network I. J I. J L J U or messages can route to specific nodes only. Routing can be - ForEN-54 compliance, p/ease see page 4. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY U.S. SALES: SARASOTA, FL 941-739-4200; FAX 941-727-0740 • CANADA SALES: OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-2430; FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES: 905-270-1711: FAX 905-270-9553 • CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS: CHESHIRE, CT • U.S. MANUFACTURING: PITFSFIELD. ME Issue 4 Literature Sheet #65010-0071 Page 1 014 low the general status LEDs are located four, LEDI Switch mon controls. The versatility of EST3 allows system design- ers to define the features as affecting a domain (defined group of nodes) or as global (affects all nodes) across the network. This feature is very useful when configuring systems with multiple buildings on one network. As an example, operating the reset in one building may have adverse effect in other buildings. With EST3 having operational differences between buildings on the same network is not a problem. Pressing Reset starts the system's reset operation. The yellow LED has three flash rates during reset. The LED flashes fast during the smoke power down phase of reset, flashes slow during the restart phase, and turns on steady for the restoral phase. The Reset LED turns off when the system is normal. Pressing Alarm Silence turns off all Notification Appliance Circuits defined as audible. The yellow LED turns on when silence is active via the Alarm Silence switch or via alarm silence software timers. Pressing Panel Silence turns-off the system's internal audible signal. The yellow LED turns on when panel silence is active. The EST3 panel buzzer has user programmable signal rates for alarm, supervisory, trouble and monitor conditions. Pressing Drill turns on the drill LED and all signals sound evacua- tion. Drill does not activate city tie connections. Auxiliary relays will not activate unless programmed to do so with drill. In the center of the 3-LCD is the Liquid Crystal Display. In the normal condition the date and time plus a definable system title display on the LCD. The last line of the display gives an alarm history. This total equals the number of times the system has entered the alarm state from the normal state. When active events are on display, the LCD formats into four logical windows. - - -- - 55TEfl STATUS IJINO0W } CURRENT EVENT IJlI'IDOIJ LOCATION nEs5n6E-LrrtE-1-I--}—t-R-s-T—E-LrEriT-urrloou - - LOCATION flE5SR&E L,fIE2jJ -- 5000 T000 OOO I TYPE STATUS &nNDUIJ In the system status window.- the display-shows the time and the status of active and disabled points.- - - -----: - The current event windo W1,riès 23caUtortitically display the first active event of the highest priority- ff.theuser has not taken control of the system Ori th merg yus~ertakes -control,-this window displays user messageselections The second line of the displahosystem event information. In the example above the display shows the chronological number of 00; the event (0001 is the first alarm) followed by the event type (Alarm Active). EST3 supports over 45 event type messages from which system designers choose. The lasttwo lines of the current event window are custom programmable location message lines with space for 42 characters. , I • . The last event window shows the last I I revuous I highest priority event. This window is I I M always displayed and updated auto- I essage matically by the system. Here the I I I emergency user can monitor the t_J Next J progress of a fire. When EST3 is configured for a local mode system viewing the second alarm message is easy,just press the NEXT key. The next message scrolls into the current event window. The last highest priority event always remains on view. No matter what queue the user selects for viewing, the LCD always displays the most recent alarm. A new alarm event resounds the panel audible signal and appears immediately on display without overwriting information the user selected forview. The final window of the LCD the type status window shows the total number of active events by queue type. A is alarm, S is supervi- sory, Tis trouble, and M is monitor. The number following each letter is the number of active events existing in each queue. EST3 breaks down event types into queues and automatically displays the first eventof the highest priority type. For EN-54 compliance, please see page4. Priority order is alarm, supervisory, trouble, monitor. By using queues an emergency user does not waste time scrolling through a mixed event list looking for alarms or confusing an alarm message with other message types. EST3 configures for Remote proprietary system operation where every event must be acknowledged by viewing them before the internal buzzer will silence. Or the EST3 will configure for Local operation. Here the internal buzzer silences by pressing panel silence. If any events exist in queues that have not been viewed the queue LED continues to flash informing the user of un-seen events. When all events in a queue are acknowledged or 'seen', the LED associated with the queue turns on steady. If a new event is added to the queue, the EST3 internal buzzer resounds and the queue LED flashes. - EST3 allows device grouping into logical group zones. Here two or more alarm devices (such as detectors or pull stations) make up the zone. When a device in the zone activates, the LCD displays the zone description. Each zone only displays once, regardless of the number of devices active within the zone. To display device information the user presses the Details key. The ië withthe lwest address displays in the first window. I'J E~D If multiple devices are active each is - available for viewing by using the arrow associated with the Previous Message Next key and scrolling through the device list. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Page 2 of 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0071 Issue 4 . The common controls easily expand beyond the Main Display interface by adding a Control Display Module and assigning features to its switch controls. For Maintenance users, the EST3 provides a smooth operating menu system providing powerful tools for system management, reports, andtrouble shooting. Specifications Catalog Number 3-LCD Agency Listings . UL, ULC, FM, CE, EN-54 LCD Display Eight lines by 21 characters backlit LCD Mounting Two local rail spaces on top of 3-CPU Common Control Switches and LEDs Reset switch and LED Alarm Silence switch and LED Panel Silence switch and LED Drill Switch and LED Alarm Current 153mA Standby Current 153mA Engineers Specification The system shall provide a user interface that displays system events in a text format, and supports basic common control LEDs and switches. The Common Control Switches and LEDs provided as minimum will be; Reset switch and LED, Alarm Silence switch and LED, Panel Silence switch and LED, Drill switch and LED. It must be possible to add additional common controls as required through the use of modular display units. The user interface must provide an LCD that will allow custom event messages of up to 42 characters. The interface must provide a minimum of eight lines by 21 characters and provide the emergency user, hands free viewing of the first and last highest priority event. The last highest priority event must always display and update automatically. Events shall be automatically placed in easy to access queues. It shall be possible to view specific event types separately. Having to scroll through a mixed list of event types is not acceptable. The total number of active events by type must be displayed. Visual indication must be provided of any event type which has not been acknowledged or viewed. It must be possible to customize the designation of all user interface LEDs and Switches for local language requirements. It shall be possible to have a custom message for each device in addition to zone messages. Custom device messages must support a minimum of 42 characters each. Instructional text messages support maximum of 1,000 characters each. The display shall be capable of displaying English, Spanish, French, or Russian messages. Ordering Information Catalog Number Description Shipping Weight lb. (kg) 3-LCD Liquid Crystal Display Module .8 (.36) 3-LKE UK English Label Kit .25(.11) 3-LKF French Label Kit .25(.11 3-LKR Russian Label Kit .25 (.11) 3-LKS Spanish Label Kit 4 .25 (.11) Installation and Mounting II I r — —• I-.—i o wl i1 !- EiUi rui L!!RI ri ii = U •• • - o il I... . . . -_ u • ._ i. ISI. s.... • 1 UR • ; - EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Issue 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0071 Page 3 of 4 Switch Functions Reset] [ On/Off (Panefl tSilence J [!II] IB13ME13 Pressing Sounder On/Off turns off all sounder circuits defined as audible. The yellow LED turns on when silence is activated via the Sounder On/Off or via the alarm silence software timers. See Page 2 for descriptions of Reset, Panel Silence, and Drill functions. --*N-,54 Compliance In 1998 the British-based Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB) certified EST3 control panels and power supplies as having surpassed the requirements of the pivotal EN-54 standard, parts two and four. LPCB Certificate #257c for EST3 fire alarm control panels marks the first such certification since the stringent EN standards were ratified in 1997. In order to meet these standards, display and control functions have undergone slight modifications for the EN-54 marketplace. These differences are highlighted below. All other control and annunciation features remain unchanged. System Status LEDs 0 0 0 0 0 Power Test CPU Sounder Disable Fault Power LED (Green): on when DC power is on. Test LED (Yellow): on when any portion of the system (Group) is undertest. CPU Fault LED (Yellow): on when CPU stops running (processor failures must be manually reset). Grid Fault LED: Not available. Sounder LED (Yellow): flashing indicates fault on sounder circuit. Steady indicates a disabled sounder circuit. isable LED (Yellow): on when any point or zone is disabled by a er (disabled conditions have priority over fault conditions). Event Queues Ho Ho] HO1 H01 Fire Fault Loisable 1._Monitor For EN-54 compliance, EST3 configures for remote proprietary system operation. This requires that every event must be acknowledged by viewing them before the internal buzzer will silence. The priority order is Fire, Fault, Disable, Monitor. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact EST. ©1999EST Ptoted in U.SA Page 4 of 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0071 Issue 4 (E Compiiesto EN54 Part 2 and 4. 3-CPU3 EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY CONTROL AND ANNUNCIATION Compatibility *1 Central Processor Unit Module Model: 3-CPU3, 3-RS485A, 3-R5485B, 3-RS232 16bitprocessor Up to 1,000 history events RS-485 local rail communications Multiplexed audio channels Network communication RS-485 RS-232 communication card Form 'C' contacts for: Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble Low voltage memory write protection F. Description The 3-CPU3 is the Central Processing Unit Module monitoring the status of all modules and providing the linkfor network communi- cations. Although each local rail card contains their own micro- processor, the 3-CPU3 provides all inter-module communication and has the ability to download rail module operating parameters. Upon power up the 3-CPU3 automatically learns all local rail module attributes and locations. Site specific software is loaded into the 3-CPU3 which then downloads data to each local rail module. Firmware upgrades are also done from the 3-CPU3 eliminating the need to unplug chips on rail modules. Internal rail communications is accomplished in a broadcast protocol forfast response. Mounting must be in the first two local rail spaces. Options forthe 3-CPU3 include the addition of an LCD display and User Interface, RS-232 Communication Card, and RS-485 Series Network Commu- nication Cards. The 3-CPU3 is fully compatible with the 3-CPU and 3-CPU 1 modules. Application The 3-CPU3 helps make EST3 an extremely powerful and flexible system. As a single node, stand alone system a single 3-CPU3 controls 1 to 19 local rail modules. For larger systems, up to 64 nodes interconnect on a peer-to-peer multi-priority token ring protocol network. The 3-CPU3 controls all local panel responses to automatic, user initiated, or network reported events. As a network node, it is an equal among peers, there is no master on the network. This gives exceptional response times overthe network, less than three seconds. Each 3-CPU3 provides slots atthe back for mounting Network, and RS-232, cards. Removable terminal blocks on the 3-CPU3 support connection of network and audio data wiring. On board common relays also terminate at the 3-CPU3 terminals. To aid in trouble shooting and service, status LEDs monitor local rail, network, RS232 and audio data communications. The Network Communications card mounts to the back of the Central Processor Unit. The 3-RS485A card provides a Class 'A (Style 7) or Class B (Style 4) circuitfor network Communications signals and two additional Class A (Style 7) circuits for the digitized audio signals. The 3-RS485B card provides a Class B (Style 4) or Class A (Style 7) circuit for network communications signals and a second Class B (Style 4) circuit for the digitized audio signals. Network messages received by the NetórkCo ,iiinicàtiñi card are re-transmitted to the next network node. Re-transmission maximizes the wire run lengths between nodes. With 64 àJés miles of network length is possible. Fail safe mechanisms built into the card direct connect the data input and output ports should the network card or its related Central Processor fail-. Network communications may be configured via using the 3-FIBMB. •- -= The 3-RS232 Communication Card mounts to-the back of-the 3- CPU3. The 3-RS232 has two optically isolated RS232ports:TheTT— ports support connection of a printer and/or an externalcommand center. Entire network downloading from one location (to all 64 nodes) is available through the RS-232 card. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY U.S. SALES: BRADEN4TON, FL 888-378-2329; FAX 866603,39% • CANADA SALES: OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-2430; FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES: 905-270-1711; FAX 905-270-9553 • CORPORATE HEADOUARTflS: CHESHIRE. CT • US. MANUFN1URING: PITTSFIEW &NEiNPOFlE ME Issue 2 Literature Sheet #85010-0133 Page 1 of 4 Not to be used for installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates visit www.est.net. 0pecificalions Catalog Number 3-CPU3 Agency Listings UL, ULC, CSFM, CE, EN54 Mounting 2 - Left most local rail spaces Terminal Size 18-12AWG (1.0mm2 to 2.5mm2) Standby Current 145 mA Alarm Current 155 mA Contact Ratings Nonbypassable Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble Form 'C' 1A at 30 Vdc Data Down Loading RJ45 Jack Operating Environment 0°C - 49°C (32° F - 120° F); 93% at 40°C Non-Condensing Option Cards Catalog number 3-RS232 3-RS485A 3-RS4858 Standby Current 48 mA 55 mA 55 mA Alarm Current 48 mA 55 mA 55 mA Communication Ports Two optically isolated RS-232 Three RS-485 Class A (Style 7) One Class B (Style 4) or Class A (Style 7) network data circuit and one Class B (Style 4) audio data circuit Agency Listings UL, ULC. CSFM, CE, LPCB, EN54 Part 2 and 4 Mounting Back of 3-CPU3 Operating Environment 0°C - 49° C (32° F - 120° F); 93% at 40° C Non-Condensing Engineering Specification !nsta!iation and Mounting must be possible to support a single stand alone node or up to . . - - 4 nodes communicating on a peer-to-peer token ring protocol : : network. Network and digitized audio wiring shall be run in a [choose one: Class A (Style 7)or Class B (Style 4)]configuration. 0 0 0 0 0 U 0 Network alarm response from alarm inputto signal activation must be under 3 seconds. All field wiring must be to removable terminal blocks. Status LEDs must be provided for communica- tions of network and internal rail communications. Inter-node communication speed must be programmable. Internal rail U II U communications speed must be programmable. rntral Piucessor L L - L L L Unit Me R R Iu3 IMIMIMIMIM R R R S • S S S Data Maximum resistance between any 3 panels 90 Ohms Maximtimcapacitance between any 3 panels 0.3pF Maximum distance between any panels 5,000 ft. (1,524 m) Capacitance, entire. network MaximumAccumulative Capacitance Wire Sue 38.4K Baud 19.2K Baud ---1S;AWG .1.4pF.. . . 2.8pF - 16AWG 18pF 3.6 10 4.2pF Maximum resistance between any 3 panels 90 Ohms • Maximum capacitance between any 3 panels 0.09pF Maximum distance between any 3 panels 5,000 ft. (1,524 m) EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Page 2 of 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0133 Issue 2 Not to be used for installation purposes. For the most Current literature and updates visit www.eat.net. - -. - _Network Audio Riser riciass A only +- 0) ' r-- (ED— C IL 0 (0) Ordering Information Catalog Number Description Ship Wt. - lb (kg) 3-CPU3 Central Processor Unit Module 0.71b (0.32kg) 3-RS485A Network Communications Card, Class A (Style 7) 0.331b (0.15kg) 3-RS485B One Class NB network data circuit and one Class B audio data circuit 0.331b (0.15kg) 3-RS232 RS-232 Communication Card 0.331b (0.15kg) Typical Wiring COMMON SYSTEM RELAYS 3- 'a 1 Maximum #14AWG (1.5mm2)wire; minimum Co #18 AWG (0.75 mm') 0. 2 All shields, if used, must be continuous and insulated from ground, except at the originating 'a panel. S 3 Class A network data requires one pair of wires < connecting the last node to the first node. eoll CO Co 4 Class A audio data requires two pairs of wires running in opposite directions, originating at the FWWWWWWW node containing the ASU. O0 0 0000 0_9,J Conned to TB) on 3-CRU3 Module 0 ComgAL,nsseouon&aae -a. 0 Connect to 152 on 3-CPtJ3 Module Z0/ I I /00000000o0000000000 DES FEMALE (REAR VE (5) com PORT #2ftsolated) (3)4 TO PRINTER OR REMOTE -J COMMAND SYSTEM, 1o1 (REAR VW) IMP L -h:: P #2(isolated) OORT 4 T PRINTER OR REMOTE (3) COMMAND SYSTEM, p14d M13--P525 Lo j—Pii 04 (DB25FEMALE (REAR VW) (7) COM (3) R30JJ 4 PORT #1 ISOLATED PORT TO PRINTER OR REMOTE COMMAND SYSTEM. (2) TXD I EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Issue 2 Literature Sheet #85010-0133 Page 3 of 4 Not to be used for Installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates visit www.est.net. p EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We cannot cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet contact EST © 2004 EST Printed in U.S.A. (origin) Page 4 of 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0133 Issue 2 Not to be used for Installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates visit www.est.net. A product ot EST Marketing, Bradenton, FL • EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY TPI COMMUNICATIONS Single Mode & Multi Mode Fiber Optic Communications Interface Models: 3-FIBMB, SMXLO, SMXHI, MMXVR Features Class A or Class B (Style 7 or Style 4) network data connections Class A or Class B (Style 7 or Style 4) audio data connections Node to node distances up to: 8,000 ft. (2.4 km) using multi-mode fiber 24.85 mi (40 km) using single mode fiber Built-in test signal ill Secondary power input Transition from copper to fiber on same network Transition from single to multi-mode fiber on same network be calculated for each installation. One transceiver is required for each fiber side of both network and audio links. Simply order the required type and number and type of transceiver(s) for your application. f Description EST3 networks easily configure to single or multi mode fiber optic or combination fiber optic / copper networks using the 3-FIBMB Fiber Optic Communications Interface and the appropriate fiber optic transceivers. The 3-FIBMB electronics card plugs right into the CPU. A ribbon cable connects the 3-CPU directly tothe 3-FIBMB fiber interface card. The interface Card mounts in the 1/zfootprint space in a 3- CHAS7 chassis or 3-CAB5 enclosure. The 3-FIBMB supports from one to four single or multi mode transceivers that plug into the interface card. Each transceiver provides the transmission and reception capability for the network data or digital audio data to/from a 3-FIBMB located in the next network node using single and/or multi mode fiber optic cables_ The SMXLO standard output single mode transceiver is suitable for distances up to approximately 8.7 miles (14km). The SMXHI high output single mode transceiver is available to span distances up to approximately 24 miles (40km). For multi mode applications, the MMXVR transceiver is suitable for distances up to approximately 8,000ft (2,400m) Actual distances are dependent on the losses in each fiber optic circuit, and should The 3-FIBMB also supports copper wire connections, permitting network data and audio communications format changes from copper to single mode fiber, copper to multi-mode fiber, and single to multi-mode fiber, as job conditions require. All copper and fiber circuits can be configured as supervised Class A or Class B (Style 7 or Style 4) circuits. The 3-FIBMB has a constant outputtest signal thatsimplifles installing and testing multi-mode fiber circuits only, reducing setup and troubleshooting time. Secondary power inputterminals and an external 24 Vdc source can be used to provide continuous network and audio data to flow through the 3-FIBMB, when the panel is powered down for servicing. Application Fiber optics communication links provide a high level of immunity from electrical noise. The circuits are power limited and suitable for use through hazardous atmospheres. Fiber optic circuits also provide a high level of security and are resistant to the effects of moisture. The choice of either single mode or multi mode fiber links is one of costvs the distances between nodes. System performance is identical with either single or multi mode fiber. NOTE: The 3-FIBM8/MMXVRis compatible with 3-FIB(A) multi mode fiber modules. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY US. SALES: BRADENTON, FL 888-378-2329; FAX 866-503.3996 • CANADA SALES: OWEN SOUND, ON 519-375-2430; FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATiONAl SALES: 905-270-1711; FAX 905-270-9553 • CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS: CHESHIRE, CT • US. MANUFACTURMJG: PITTSFIELD. ME Issue 3 Literature Sheet #85010-0131 Page 1 of 4 Not to be used for Installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates visit www.est.net. ,Pical Wiring ne following wiring diagrams can be used with single or multimode fiber. If using single mode use the SMXLO or SMXHI transceivers. If using multimode use the MMXVR transceivers. CPU with 3.FIBMB -cr. • CPU with 3-FIBMB Tx Fiber-optic network data nser Fiber-optic audio data riser CPU with 3-FIBMB TX >• '- From 3-ASU primary audio data 3-FIBMB Class B network and audio fiber-optic connections CPU with 3-FIBMB a To next panel Fiber-optic network data riser CPU with 3-FIBMB TX Rx ___ Fiber-optic audio data riser CPU with 3-FIBM8 1 Lo& ! :L _____________ Copper wire network data riser Copper wire audio data riser CPU .s.o A. nOR a.. flair eeeeeeeeø From previous panel Class B hybrid fiber-optic and copper wire network and audio connections Legend . Single mode transceiver Multimode 0 RX transceiver CPU with 3-FIBMB ______ • j. ,Tx • ix - eeeøeeeeeøeo\ • Fiber-optic network Fiber-optic audio data riser data riser CPU with 3-FIBMB TX > :4= •Pix JA TX T .AX IX- . CPU with 3-FIBMB • i-;iiii __ iTx aSø®zSøeøøes\ RX!_ Maintain physical separation or two-hour fire rating ___________ CPU with 3-FIBMB > From 3-ASU primary audio data 3-CPU Class A network and audio fiber-optic connections CPU with 3-FIBMB ( t see\ I ID ___ ax_ Copper wire network Fiber-Optic =data -=ire riser CPU with 3-FIBMB TX • __ TX RXD -RX 9Di SeøøøeSeSøSe\ Fiber-optic audio data riser CPU with 3-FIBMB Dl RX!9D - ortwohourtlrerating CPU with 3-HBMB — flil O X : : -11 RXi; L Copper wire network data riser Copper wire audio data riser CPU - - From ASU primaij 3-CPU hybrid fiber-optic and copper Wire nétwórkandClass A fiber-optic and copper wire audio connections Note: These diagrams are for general information only. For more wiring diagrams and installation details, please refer to 3-FIBMBFiber Optic Interface, Installation Sheet 3100509. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Page 2 of 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0131 Issue 3 Not to be used for Installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates visit www.est.net. To next panel To next panel CPU with 3-FIBMB TX RX [1L TX RX : CPU with 3-FIBMB DC RXL t r—-Tx eeeø0000eaeø\ RX [CPU with 3-FIBMB IX > RX RX j. RX IoU~A ow oJ) oa 50 CAB5 I -I Mounting 3-FIBMB bracket Mountingthe bracket and the 3-FIBMB to a CAB5 enclosure Using single and multimode transceivers Transition from single mode fiber to multimode fiber requires special configuration for the audio circuit. The following wiring diagrams show how to wire audio circuits in class B and class A using single mode and multimode fiber. To next panel To next panel CPU with 3-FiBMB a0e !)RX t-SJTX >t o:lt tL r€IJDC RX 6iTxE-i ARX ATX 9UE?4 ii eeøaaweeesws\ I II Multimode transceivers / \ CPU with 3-FIBMB I'. ix >l Rxr!LTX RX jQRX Single mode transceivers / \ CPU with 3-FIBMB ix RX DC RX t 9TX R,ç 000000000000 To previous panel To previous panel Data and audio circuit for Class A using single mode and multimodefiber Wiring alternative power terminals Toafternative +24 Vdc The 3-FIBMB provides a secondary power supply power option, permitting communi- cations to flow through the module, even with panel power discon- nected. Note: In the event a panel needs to be powered down for service; a 24 V battery can be connected to the module to main- tain network and audio communications during servicing. installation and Mounting (0 o I I Attaching the transceivers. Any type of transceiver zo can be mounted in any ofthefour positions on the board. 1j '09 @1 To previous panel To previous panel - 3-PPS(/230) 3-FnMB footprint Data and audio circuit for Class B using single mode and multimodefiber -- Connecting the ribbon cable Legend and adapter card. [0 Rxcsrlj Single mode [00 g RxL Multimode--- - ITXcj transceiver Txfl transceiver These diagrams are for general information only. For - more wiring diagrams and installation details, please refer to 3-FIBMS Fiber Optic Interface, Installation Sheet 31005O9. - EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Issue 3 Literature Sheet #85010-0131 Not to be used for Installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates visit www.ast.net. ;m Nylon Nylon - nut same II c Ribbon J2 cable J2 I Fiedionica mod CPU side Flber-opbc slow bllenfeca module Page 3 of 4 I *pecifications Agency Listings UL, ULC Installation Connector J2 of 3-CPU1. Fiber card mounts on ½ footprint 3-CHAS7 or 3-CA135 enclosure. Compatibility 3-CPU 1 and later Single Mode (network & audio) Budget SMXLO 15 dBm (approximately 8.7m1. [14km] max). SMXHI 25 dBm (approximately 24.85 mi. [40km] max). NOTE: A minimum fiber attenuation of -8dBm is required when using the SMXHI in order to prevent overloading the receiver. Wavelength 1300nm Cable Type 8.j Single Mode Connector Duplex SC Multi mode (network & audio) MMXVR Budget 10 dBm (approximately 8,000 ft [2.4 km] max). Wavelength 820nm Cable Type 62.5/125p or 100/140p Multi mode -- Connector ST Network Data Circuit Circuit Configuration Class B (Style 4) or Class A (Style7) Data Rate 19.2K, or 38.4K Baud Isolation From 'previous' 3-CPU using copper, total isolation using fiber optics Digital Audio Data Circuit Circuit Configuration Class B (Style 4) or Class A (Style7) Data Rate 327K Baud Isolation From 'previous" 3-CPU using copper, total isolation using fiber optics Copper Wired Network Data Circuit Segment Circuit Length 5.000ft (1,524 m) max. between any three panels Circuit Resistance 90 Ohms, max. Circuit Capacitance 0.30 max. Wire Type Twisted pair, 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) mm Copper Wired Audio Data Circuit Segment Circuit Length 5.000 ft (1,524 m) max. between any three panels Circuit Resistance 90 Ohms, max. Circuit Capacitance 0.09 tit max. Wire Type Twisted pair, 18 AWG (0.75mm2) mm Eye Safety Complies with: FDA CDRH 2 -CFR 1040 Class 1 and IEC 825 Issue 11993:11 Class 1; CENELEC EN60825 Class 1 Power Consumption iMB2TTñ(A@ 24 Vdc; SMXLO: 45mA @24 Vdc each; SMXHI: 45mA @ 24 Vdc each; Supervisory and/or Alarm MMXVR: 20 mA @24 Vdc each Operating Environment Temperature: 32° F - 120° F (0° C - 49° C) - Humidity 93% RH, Non-condensing @90° F (32° C) Engineering Specification The intra-node communications links for network and digital audio data shall itilize copper and/or fiber-optic connections. The fiber optics interface card shall provide Class B (Style 4) or Class A (Style 7) connections It shall be possible to convertfrom fiber optic cable to copper wiring or from copper wiring to fiber optic cable at any network-panel- node. The fiber optics interface card shall have provisions ft an eternaI power source input to permit continuous network and audio data to flow through a network node whi priTharynbcte power is removed for servic- ing purposes—The fiber optics -interface-card-shall provide a constantoutputtestsignáifor maintenance and troubleshooting purposes. The ptiiiiiiérf iiiilijIè shall—utilize—single[ multi mode fiber with SC single mode or ST multi-mode connec tors. Ordering Information Catalog Description Shipping Wt. Number lb (kg) 3FIBMB Fiber Optic Communications Interface 1.0(.45) (requires one or more transceivers) c/w mounting bracket for 3-CHAS7 or 3-CAB5 enclosure mounting *SMXLO Plug-In standard output single mode 0.5(.23) - transceiver for 3-FIBMB *SMXHI Plug-In high output single mode 0.5(.23) transceiver for 3-FIBMB *MMXVR Plug-In standard output multi mode 0.5(.23) transceiver for 3-FIBMB 1 to 4 transceivers required, depending on application. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet contact EST. © 2004 EST P,inted in U.S.A. Page 4 of 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0131 Issue 3 Not to be used for installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates visit ww'.est.not. f r~~AZE EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY CONTROL AND ANNUNCIATION Control Display Modules Model: 3-LDSM, 3-24x series,3-12xx series, 3-6l3S1xxx series Features U Programmable LED flash rates Membrane style tactile pushbuttons Software supported for toggle, and latching interlock switch action J Slide in labels U Lamp test Description The EST3 Control Display modules provide the emergency user with the simplest of interfaces, lights and switch control. The Control Display modules install over local rail modules. The local rail modules supply the power and drivers via a ribbon cable connection to the control display modules. The displays mount over any local rail module maximizing the flexibility of design layout. When a display module is required where no local rail module exists, an LED Display Support Module 3-LDSM mounts to the local rail providing support for one Control Display Module Surface mount technology used to minimize space, also reduces the power requirements of display modules. Slide-in labels keep the control display modules flexible and allow labeling for local languages. Module lamp test can be programmed to any spare control switch or a local node lamp test is initiated by simultaneously operating the Alarm Silence and Trouble Silence switches on the 3-CPU. ; : 1.E 461M ii_• I '• IU THIN = IWikb1114 El Application Notes Control Display Modules come - in a variety of types providing =ED 1= jJj QjJ operational flexibility. There ar = MD EJ CD 11fl five types of display modules : ME LD available with EST3. =co K= fL 977 ftLJ a= ED tLJ Typically alarm zone annuncia- : tion appears on any of the first : __ L) four module types shown. The = first module supports simple E zone annunciation; the second, = D CCL) JJ zone annunciation with zone - - - - disable; the third, alarm and - trouble zone annunciation, the fourth alarm and trouble zone annunciation with zone disable. From a simple one LED annunciation point to higher functionality, EST3 fills the requirements. The fifth module is very adaptable to system requirements for audio or remote equipment control. Each module contains 18 LEDs and 18 switches. Each group of three switches has a latching-interlock to support operations that must be kept separated. The interlock is under software control so only one switch is active at given time. EST3 software makes meeting the wide variety of applications needed with today's codes and building system operations easy. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY U.S. SALES: SARASOTA FL 941.739-4200; FAX 941-727-0740 • CANADA SALES: OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-2430: FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES: 905-270-1711: FAX 905-270-9553 • CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS: CHESHIRE, CT • U.S. MANUFACTURING: PIUSFIELD, ME Issue 3 Literature Sheet #85010-0055 Page 1 of 4 ømple Control Examples ON F a U AUTO n 5 U OFF o OPEN Damper U AUTO 5th Fir LI CLOSE For fan control the emergency user assumes control of the remote device by selecting "On' or "Off." Programming of the switches to multiple relays keeps operational design choices open. The user returns the system control of the remote device to the Life Safety system by simply pressing Auto. The Auto LED programs to its related switch and gives positive feed back to the user by turning on yellow when the system has active control of remote devices. Individual switch LEDs are also programmable. As an example the "Open" or "On" LED (green) could program to follow its related switch or, program to follow a remote monitor input and provide positive feedback of the remote devices control status. If budget restrictions prevent "sail type" positive feedback, EST's unique command processing satisfy requirements for positive feedback of HVAC control systems. Any switch command will send a signal to the 3- CPU for processing. While in this state the LED associated with the switch will flash. Once the command has been received by a remote Signature Series Module, the module (since it is intelligent with its own microprocessor) will issue a "Processed" command back to the 3-CPU which will latch the LED associated with the switch "ON" steady. This same process is used for all audio speaker selections ensuring the circuit is connected. A variety of switch and associated LED colors are available to meet the demands of the specifiers application, Life Safety Systems are generally passive requiring only occa- sional operation. Yet, in an emergency the user must be able to identify system operation and status quickly and easily. LCD displays are excellent for identifying specific information, but even a large LCD can not display overall "system" status as effectively as LEDs and Switches. The EST3 Control Display modules are designed to provide simple identification and operation of system functions for the emergency user. They provide positive feedback of control activity with unrivaled selection of display configurations and mounting location options. Engineers Specification The Life Safety system shall incorporate annunciation of Alarm, upervisory, Trouble and Monitor operations. Annunciation must JW through the use of LED display strips complete with a means to custom label each LED as to its function. Where applicable control of remote smoke control devices must be made available at the control center. Switches with LEDs must provide positive feed back to the operator of remote equipment status. Where voice audio is required a means of paging individual zones must be made. The status of each paging zone must be annunciated. It must be possible to selectively page into specific zones. It shall be possible to manipulate the evacuation of the building from the main control center. It must be possible for the emergency operator to put specific zones into evacuation manually. Installation and Mounting Module RAN I z IEI I -- —uu = U• tIi = ta i•a I. .R ita a 4.- 'it. ta __ {U• IIi EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Page 2 014 Literature Sheet #85010-0055 Issue 3 Specifications Notes: All Control Display Modules are UL and ULC listed. All Control Display Modules mount over one Local Rail Module. If no local rail module exists the 3-LDSM mounts to local rail and supports one control display module. Catalog Number of LED I Switches Applications Alarm Standby I Number LEDs Colors Current Current 3-LDSM N/A Provides interface for one Control Display Module 11 mA InI Electrical Room 1 3-24R 24 red o Alarm Annunciation 2mA_ 15mA 3-24Y yellow Supervisory and Trouble Annunciation 3-24G green Monitor Annunciation 12 red over Red LEDs Alarm Annunciation 3 12RY 12 yellow pairs Yellow LEDs Supervisory Annunciation ri ECth Room 3-12SR - 12 red 12 Alarm Annunciation with enable/disable operation 2mA 7mA 3-12SY yellow Supervisory Annunciation with enable/disable operation 3-12SG green Monitor Annunciation, Page select rn Electri p± j RoomJ 3-12/S1GY green/ yellow Zone Page select with Trouble Annunciation 12 groups 3-12/Si RY of red/yellow 12 Alarm and Trouble Annunciation with enable/disable 2mA 15mA two w/switch yellow/ Supervisory and Trouble Annunciation with enable/disable - 3-12/S2Y yellow -- -- - Page Floor 5 o Trouble EVAC 36/3S1G2Y Six groups of three green/yellow Six groups On-Auto-Off fan and Open-Auto-Close Damper Control -lOmA -- -I _2mA 6/3S1GYR w/switch green/yellow of three Page and Evacuation select with zone trouble - - EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Issue 3 Literature Sheet #85010-0055 Page 3 or 4 S Ordering Information catalog Number Description Shipping Weight 3-LDSM LED Display Support Module .451b (.2kg) 3-24R 24 Red LED Display Module 3-24Y 24 Yellow LED Display Module 3-24G 24 Green LED Display Module 3-12SR 12 switches with 12 Red LED Display/Control Module 3-1 2SY 12 switches with 12 Yellow LED Display/Control Module 3-12SG 12 switches with 12 Green LED Display/Control Module 3-12RY 12 Red LED and 12 Yellow LED Display Module .351b (.12kg) 3-1 2/Si GY 12 switches with one Green and one Yellow LED per switch Display/Control Module 3-12/S1RY 12 switches with one Red and one Yellow LED per switch Display/Control Module 3-1 2/S2Y 12 switches with two Yellow LEDs per switch Display/Control Module 3-6/351 G2Y Six groups of three switches. Each switch with one LED. LEDs provided Green, Yellow, Yellow. 3-6/3S1GYR Six groups of three switches. Each switch with one LED. LEDs provided Green, Yellow, Red. n EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact EST. 01999 EST PlintedeUSA Page 4 of 4 LIterature Sheet #85010-0055 Issue 3 EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY CONTROL AND ANNUNCIATION Signature Driver Controller Modules Model: 3-SSDC1, 3-SDDCI, 3-SSDC1-MB, 3-SDC1 Features One or two circuit versions- Dedicated microprocessor control Full digital communication Specialized communication protocol - Less sensitive to cable characteristics -Utilize existing wiring in most applications Loop alarm in under 750 milliseconds CE Compliesto EN54 Part 2 and 4. I Device location supervision - Unexpected additional device addresses - Missing device addresses - Switched device locations - Programmed device parameters I Automatic nonvolatile as-built mapping - Stores "actual" and "expected" device data - Stores physical connection sequence including "T" taps 93 Automatic day/night sensitivity I Supports up to 250 intelligent Signature detectors and 250 Intelligent Signature Modules I Upto five 3-SDDCls per node -Total oflO Signature circuits - Removable field wiring terminal blocks Multiple survival modes—stand alone Ground fault detection by loop and by Signature Module Circuit -. I Automatic electronic device addressing - I Fully backward compatible with 3 SSDC and 3-SDDC Description The 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 Signature Driver Controller modules provide an intelligéñtifitdifice betweeWthe 3CPUC13) module and Signature Series devices. .E liiuiitóithT.TiiiI processor used to coordinate; process and interpret information received from and sent to Signature devices. Power and communi- cations is received directly from the control panel rail assembly. The 3-SSDC1 Single Signature Driver Controller module supports one Signature Data circuit, while the 3-SDDC1 Signature Dual Driver Controller module supports two Signature circuits. Both modules occupy one rail space in the fire alarm control cabinet and provide removable field wiring terminals to aid installation. Innovative design givesthe 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 and Signature devices truly 'distributed intelligence". Signature detectors and modules have their own on-board microprocessor communicating with the loop controller in a fully digital communication format This increases the accuracy of the information coming to and from the loop controller by reducing the effects of capacitance and noise. With decentralized intelligence much of the decision making moves from the loop controller to the devices. Advanced fire detection algorithms processed within the Signature devices effectively end unwanted alarms. Environmental compensation and multiple sensing element decision making operations are resident in the devices. lnteltigentdevices allow the Signature Controllers to execute commu- nication and system functions with greater speed and low baud rates, increasing the accuracy of information transmitted between the loop controller and devices. To enhance survivability of the system the3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 supports a standalone mode for Signature devices. Two cata- strophic failure modes are supported. If the 3-CPU(1/3) fails, the loop controller will continue to poll its devices. If an alarm is detected it will be sent on the local rail communication bus and received by other local rail modules. A common alarm condition throughoutthe panel will result. If the local rail module (3-SSDC1-/3SDDC1) fails, and a device (smoke or module) detects an alarm, specialized circuitry will make the node aware of the alarm condition. The 3-CPU( 1/3) will communicate the alarm condition to the restof the network. Having multiple redundant modes is paramount in a life safety system. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY US, SALES: BRADENTON, FL 888-378-2329; FAX 866603-3996 • CANADA SALES: OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-2430; FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES: 905-270-1711; FAX 905-270-9553 • CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS: CHESHIRE. CT • US MANUFACTURING: PFITSFIELD& NEWPORT, ME Issue 2 Literature Sheet #85010-0129 Page 1 of 4 Not to be used for installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates visit www.est.net. Opplication p to 125 detectors and 125 modules are supported over a single pair of wires by the 3-SDC1 Signature Cards that plug into the Signature controller modules. Both Class A wiring (style 6 or style 7) and Class B (style 4) wiring are supported. Loop distances over 11,000feet (3300m) are possible. The 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 use advanced communication formats that provide exceptional response. Using a "BROADCAST POLL" the loop controller checks the entire device circuitfor any changes of state. Should one or more devices report a change the 3-SSDC1/ 3-SDDC1 uses "DIRECTADDRESS SEARCH" to find reporting device(s). Devices that have entered the alarm state or become active are located nearly instantaneously. The unique use of "BROADCAST POLLING" combined with "DIRECTADORESS SEARCH" ensures that only new information is transmitted allowing a reduced baud rate with fast response time. The low baud rate is ideal for retrofit applications since in most applications existing wiring can be used. Everytime the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 communicates with a detector the green LED on the detector flashes. Normal green LED activity is not disturbing to building occupants, but can be quickly spotted by a maintenance technician. The red LED on the detector turns on only in the alarm condition. The 3-SSDC 1/3-SDDC1 also supervises the device wiring, physical location of each device and the programmed device characteris- tics. This EST/Signature Series unique characteristic is accom- lished by "MAPPING" the Signature circuit and committing the ap to memory. Upon power up the loop controller will scan evice serial numbers and map their physical location sequence on the loop, including "T" taps. After mapping is complete the - -2controller automatically addresses each detector and module through downloading over the loop. There are no switches or dials to set. Each device is assigned a unique soft address generated by the site specific program. The 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 then compares the "Actual" physical device data to the "Expected" site specific program data. If any correlations are different, the loop controller issues a trouble to the CPU identifying the devices which do not match and posting a map fault. Through the 3-CPU(1 .3)'s RS-232 port a graphical map of the loop can be uploaded depicting each device's location on the loop, including branches (T-Taps) and all of the physical attributes associated with the device. This diagnostic information is unparalleled in the fire detection industry and vital for keeping accurate records on how the system was installed. During installation a common problem with analog/ addressable systems is locating ground faults. The 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 controllers have the ability to locate ground faults by specific - module, speeding up the troubleshooting process. Another significant advantage of the 3-SDC1/3-SDDC1 controllers during - commissioning is electronic addressing and mapping. This - eliminates duplicate addresses, which are also very difficuitfor mostsystems to locate. During maintenance, should groups of detector heads be removed for service and returned into the wrong smoke detector base (location), the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 will automatically detectthe problem. If the attributes of the switched devices are the same, the system will automatically download the correct soft addresses and algorithms to the devices (maintaining location supervision). If the attributes are notthe same the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 will send a map fault indication to the 3-CPU(1.3) and post a trouble indicating the specific devices in fault. The 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 also monitors the Signature Series devices for maintenance and trouble conditions. Each smoke detector contains intelligence to adjust with environmental changes. This expands the amount of time required between cleaning while maintaining a con stant alarm threshold. As the detector begins to exhaust the environmental compensation, and reaches the 80% level, the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 will indicate a maintenance alert or dirty condition to the 3-CPU(1.3) and indicate the specific device requiring cleaning. If cleaning is not performed the detector will continue to operate until all of its environmental compensation is utilized. At this point the 3-SSDC 1/3-SDDC 1 sends a dirty trouble indication to the 3-CPU(1 .3) and posts a trouble condition. If maintenance is still not performed the Signature detectorwill automatically remove itself from service once the programmed threshold window has been breached (preventing a false alarm). Remote test capability permits devices to be put in alarm, prealarm, supervisory, monitor, or security alarm or troublefrom the panel menu or controls. This facilitates testing of smoke and heat detectors as well as monitor and security devices. The 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 local rail modules modules are fully backwards compatible with the 3-SSDC and 3-SDDC local rail modules. 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 modules provide additional onboard memory to facilitate future Synergy functions. To upgrade a 3-SSDC/3-ADDC to a 3-SSDC1!3-SDDC1 respectively, replace the 3-SSDC/3-SDDC Local Rail Module with a 3-SDDC1-MB Local Rail Module and reuse the 3-SDC Signature Device Cards and filters. Engineering Specification The communication format between the control panel and analog devices shall be 100% digital. Loop alarm recognition must be within 750 milliseconds of a device going into the alarm state, with system response time no greater than 3 seconds. All devices shall support remote testing. It must be possible to wire the circuit as Class A or Class B with non-shielded, non-twisted wire. It must be possible to wire branches (T-taps) with Class B wiring. The driver controller must be manufactured in accordance with ISO 9001 standards. The system must have tolerance to multiple failures. There must be a standalone mode of operation that will ensure the system is aware of alarms even if the local rail or main CPU fails. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Page 2 of 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0129 Issue 2 Not to be used for Installation purposes. #14 AWG 1.5mm2 #16 AWG 1.0mm2 #18 AWG # of (38pf/foot) (36pf/foot) (36pf/foot) (25pf/foot) (25pf/foot) # of Module (2.53 (3.75 (4.02 (5.51 (6.38 Device Type Detectors Addresses Ohm/1000ft) Ohm/1000ft) Ohm/1000ft) Ohm/1000ft) Ohm/1000ft) Detectors only 125 0 13,157 feet 9,933 feet 9,275 feet 6,760 feet 5,839 feet (4,010 m) (3,028 m) (2,827 m) (2,061 m) (1,780 m) Modules Only 0 125 12,599 feet 8,483 feet 7,921 feet 5,774 feet 4,986 feet (3,840 m) (2,586 m) (2,414 m) (1,760 m) (1,520 m) Detectors & Modules 125 125 5,738 feet 3,864 feet 3,608 feet 2,630 feet 2,271 feet (1,749m) (1,178m) (1,100m) (802m) (692m) Detectors and modules with 63 55 + 7,623 feet 5,133 feet 4,793 feet 3,494 feet 3,017 feet 2-wire smokes 9 SIGA-UM (2,324 m) 0,565 m) (1,461 m) (1,065 m) (920 m) Modules with 2-wire smokes 0 107+ 3,798 feet 1 2,558 feet 2,388 feet 1,741 feet 1,503 feet 1 9 SIGA-UM (1,158 m) (780 m) (728 m) (531 m) (458 m) Twisted neir shielded wire #of #14 AWG #16 AWG #18AWG # of Module (84pf/foot) (82pf/foot) (58p1/foot) Device Type Detectors Addresses (2.53 Ohm/1,000ft) (4.02 Ohm/1,000ft) (6.38 Ohml1,000ft) Detectors only 125 0 5,952 feet 6,098 feet 5,839 feet (1,814 meters) (1,859 meters) (1,780 meters) Modules Only 0 125 5,952 feet 6,098 feet 4,986 feet (1,814 meters) (1,859 meters) (1,520 meters) Detectors & Modules 125 125 5,738 feet (1,749 meters) 3,608 feet (1,100 meters) 2,271 feet (692 meters) - Detectors and modules with 63 55+ 5,952 feet 4,793 feet 3,017 feet 2-wire smokes 9 SIGA-UM (1,814 meters) (1,461 meters) (920 meters) Modules with 2-wire smokes 0 107+ 2,558 feet 2,388 feet 1,503 feet 9 SlGA-UM (780 meters) (728 meters) (458 meters) Ordering Information Catalog Number Description Shipping Wt. lb (kg) 3-SSDC1 Single Signature Driver Controller. Comes with one 3-SDC1 Device Card. M o u n t s t o L o c a l R a i l . 0.5(0.23) 3-SDDC1 Dual Signature Driver Controller. Comes with two 3-SDC1s. Mounts to Loc a l R a i l . 0.5 (0.23) 3-SOC 1 Signature Device Card - upgrades a 3-SSDC1 to a 3-SDDC1 0.25 (0.11) RFK1 Ferrite Clamp Kit required for EN-54 compliance. 0.25 (0.11) 3-SSDC1-MB Dual Signature Driver Controller Motherboard (without 3-SDC1 device cards). Use this motherboard for upgrading 3-SSDCI3-SDDC to 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1. 5 3 0. (.2 EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Issue 2 Literature Sheet #85010-0129 Page 3 of Not to be used for Installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates visit Www.e s t . n e t . Specifications (Signature Circuits) Charts assume wire and devices are evenly distributed over length of ci r c u i t Non-twisted, non shielded wire #of #14 AWG #16 AWG #18AWG # of Module (20pflfoot) (20pf/toot) (20pf/foot) Device type Detectors Addresses (2.53 Ohm/1000ft) (4.02 Ohm/1000ft) (6.38 Ohm/1000tt) Detectors only 125 0 14,752 feet 9,275 feet 5,839 feet (4,497 meters) (2,827 meters) (1,780 meters) Modules only 0 125 12,599 feet 7,921 feet 4,986 feet (3,840 meters) (2,414 meters) (1,520 meters) Detectors and Modules 125 125 5,738 feet 3,608 feet 2,271 feet (1,749 meters) (1,100 meters) (692 meters) Detectors and Modules 63 55 + 7,623 feet 4,793 feet 3,017 feet with 2-wire smokes 9 SIGA-UM (2,324 meters) (1,461 meters) (920 meters) Modules 0 107 + 3,798 feet 2,388 feet 1,503 feet with 2-wire smokes 9 SIGA-UM (1,158 meters) (728 meters) (458 meters) Twisted neir non shielded wire ecifications .atalog Number 3-SSDC1 I 3-SDDC1 Module Configuration 1 Addressable circuit (3-SDC1 Card) expandable to 2 circuits. I 2 Addressable circuits (3-SDC1 Cards) Operating Current Standby 139 mA Alarm 158 mA I Standby 256 mA I Alarm 294 mA Operating Voltage 24 Vdc, Nominal Installation 1 IRM Space Address Requirements Automatic Detectors Supported 125 per 3-SDC1 Card Modules Supported 125 Module Addresses per 3-SDC1 Card 2-Wire Smoke Power Output 100 mA per 3-SDC1 Card (not included in "Operating Current" above Conventional detectors supported 150 of 100 pA type per circuit. Signature Circuit Voltage 20 VDC +1- 5% Maximum Signature Circuit Resistance 100 Ohms Maximum Signature Circuit Capacitance 05pF Communications Format 100% Digital Circuit Wiring Styles Class A or Class B Termination Removable plug-in terminal strip(s) on module Permissable Wire Size 18 to 12 AWG (0.75 to 2.5 mm2) Agency Listings UL, ULC, CE, and complies to EN54 Part 2 and 4. See Note 1. Operating Environment 32°F (0°C) to 120°F (49 °C) 93% RH, non-condensing Note 1: Other EST3 components are modularly listed under the following standards: UL 864 categories: UOJZ, UO(X, UUKL and SYZV, UL 294 category ALVY, UL 609 category AOTX, UL 636 category ANET, UL 1076 category APOU, UL 365 category APAW, UL 1610 category AMCX, UL 1635 category AMCX LC-S527, ULC-S301, ULC-S302, ULC-S303, ULC-S304, ULC-S306, ULC/ORD-C1076, ULC/ORD-C693 ase refer to EST3 Installation and Service Manual for complete system requirements. Typical Wiring AMA Circuit #1 scuko I I Class A Configuration Shown (Typical) s°°cl SIGNATURE Class B Configuration Shown (Typical) A tuT52on3.SDDC1 Cirajit#2 SoCm &NAo - GIG caL Maximum #I2AWG (1.5 mm') sire; 1 minimum #18AWG (0.75 mm). - •rs ...NI' T.I.f7Irr:., "TljJ A 2. All wiring supervised and power limited. Shields (if used) must be continuous and free from Earth Ground. Class A wiring. Class Bwinng. To UnNersal Module or MAO module when 2-wire smokes are powered from the module. Circuit #1 sooc1 SIGNATURE -- - CONTROLLER M000LE--- EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We cannot cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet contact EST © 2l4 EST Piteud in U.S.A. (origin) Page 4 of 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0129 Issue 2 Not to be used for Installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates visit www.aat.net. A product of EST Marketing, Bradenton, FL • EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY CONTROL AND ANNUNCIATION S Central Processor Unit Module Model: 3-CPI-11, 3-R5485A, 3-RS485B, 3-RS232 Features III 16bitprocessor a Up to 1750 history events a RS485 local rail communications a Multiplexed audio channels a Network communication RS485 RS-232 communication card a Form 'C' contacts for: Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble a Low voltage memory write protection Description The 3-CPU1 is the Central Processing Unit Module monitoring the status of all modules and providing the link for network communi- cations. Although each local rail card contains their own micro- processor, the 3-CPU1 provides all inter-module communication and has the ability to download rail module operating parameters. Upon power up the 3-CPU1 automatically learns all local rail module attributes and locations. Site specific software is loaded into the 3-CPU 1 which then downloads data to each local rail module. Firmware upgrades are also done from the 3-CPU1 eliminating the need to unplug chips on rail modules. Internal rail communications is accomplished in a broadcast protocol for fast response. Mounting must be in the first two local rail spaces. Options for the 3-CPU 1 include the addition of an LCD display and User Interface, RS-232 Communication Card, and RS-485 Series Network Commu- nication Cards. Apphcation The 3-CPU 1 helps make EST3 an extremely powerful and flexible 3-CPU1 Each 3-CPU 1 rovides slots at the back for mounting Network, and RS-232, cards. Removable terminal blocks on the 3-CPU 1 support connection of network and audio data wiring. On board common relays also terminate at the 3-CPU 1 terminals. To aid in trouble shooting and service, status LEDs monitor local rail, network. RS232 and audio data communications. The Network Communications card mounts to the back of the Central Processor Unit. The 3-RS485A card provides a Class A (Style 7) or Class B (Style 4) circuit for network communications signals and two additional Class A (Style 7) circuits for the digitized audio signals. The 3-RS485B card provides a Class B (Style 4) or Class A (Style 7) circuit for network communications signals and a second Class B (Style 4) circuit for the digitized audio signals. Network messages received by the Network Communications - _cardarere,.transmitted to the next network node. Re-transmission maximizes the wire run lengths between riödes With 64 nodes miles of network length is possible. Fail safe mechanisms built into the card direct connect the data input and output ports should the network card or its related Central Processor fail. system. As a single node, stand alone system a single 3-CPU 1 - - controls 1 to 19 local rail modules. For larger systems, up to 64 - The 3-RS232 Communication Card mounts to the back of the 3- nodes interconnect on a peer-to-peer multi priority token ring CPtrPThe3RS232 has two optically isolated RS 232 ports The protocol network. - - ---- portssupport connection of a printer and/or an external command center:Entirenetworlcdownloading from one location (to all 64 The 3-CPU 1 controls all local panel responses to automatic;user—-d)S available through theRS-232 card:— inituated,or network reported events. Asa network node, itisan - -- - -- - - -- equalamongpeers,thereisnomasteronthenetwork. Multi- - - -- priority token ring means that a node with a new alarm has priority on the network. This gives exceptional response times over the network, less than three seconds. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY U.S. SALES: SARASOTA, FL 941-739-4638; FAX 941-727-1214 CANADA SALES: OWEN SOUND ON 519-376-2430; FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONALSALES:35-270-1711; FAX 905-270-9553 CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS: CHESHIRE, CT U.S.MANUFACTIJRING: PITrSFIEW, ME Issue 5 Literature Sheet #85010-0095 Page 1of4 .,pecifications Catalog Number 3-CPU1 Agency Listings UL, ULC, FM, CE, LPCB, EN-54 Mounting 2 - Left most local rail spaces Terminal Size 18-12 AWG (1.0mm2 to 2.5mm2) Standby Current 70 mA Alarm Current - 80 mA Contact Ratings Nonbypassablo Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble Form 'C' 1A at 30 Vdc Data Down Loading RJ45 Jack Operating Environment 0°C - 49°C (32°F - 120°F); 93% at 40°C Non-Condensing Option Cards Catalog number 3-RS232 3-RS485A 3-RS485B Standby Current 48 55 55 Alarm Current 48 55 55 Communication Ports Two optically isolated RS-232 Three RS-485 Class A (Style 7) One Class B (Style 4) or Class A (Style 7) network data circuit and one I Class B (Style 4) audio data circuit Agency Listings UL, ULC, FM, CE, LPCB Mounting Back of 3-CPU1 Operating Environment 0°C - 49°C (32°F - 120°F); 93% at 40°C Non-Condensing Engineering Specification must be possible to support a single stand alone node or up to 4 nodes communicating on a peer-to-peer multi-priority token ring protocol network. Network and digitized audio wiring shall be un in a [choose one: Class A (Style 7) or Class B (Style 4)1 configu- ration. Any node on the network with a new alarm must have priority on the network. Network alarm response from alarm input to signal activation must be under 3 seconds. All field wiring must be to removable terminal blocks. Status LEDs must be provided for communications of network, RS-232, audio and internal rail communications. Internal node communication speed must be programmable. Installation and Mounting ot ii cenlral I I I I Iprocessorl L I L ) L L L I Unit IModule IRlRIRIRIR 3CPU1 II M II M II M II M ii M .....I. .1.l.L.I. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Page 2 of 4 Literature Sheet f85010-0095 Issue 5 1 Maximum #14 AWG (1 5mm)wire; minimum #18 AWG (0.75 mm2) 2 All shields, if used, must be continuous and insulated from ground, except at the originating panel. 3 Class A network data requires one pair of wires connecting the last node to the first node. 4 Class A audio data requires two pairs of wires running in opposite directions, originating at the node containing the ASU. Connect to 00 on 3-CPIJ1 Module ------------- Irk Audio Riser A only - --- _Q o --------------->__ ay -. E cn CLM Ordering Information Catalog Number Description Ship Wt. - lb (kg) 3-CPU1 Central Processor Unit Module 0.71b (0.32kg) 3-R5485A Network Communications Card, Class A (Style 7) 0.331b (0.15kg) 3-RS485B One Class NB network data circuit and one Class B audio data circuit 0.331b (0.15kg) 3-RS232 RS-232 Communication Card 0.331b (0.15kg) Typical Wiring COMMON SYSTEM RELAYS -t3Q) SQ) 0-75 75 - . 0 (h cv— 0 - o9 Z 7E i_ _i rj1 •4 ore Yi n " re 20 DB9 FEMALE (REAR (5) COM (3(120 -' .A PORT #2(isolated) TO PRINTER OR REMOTE PIN 1 COMMAND SYSTEM, I! OR ° DB2FEMALE (WAR VIEW) J 1MNt3_- 44r PORT#2isoIated) .(7)COM'i TO PRINTER OR REMOTE COMMAND SYSTEM, 130 Nt4 PIN 13 PN 25 - 0B25 FEMALE PREARVIEW) P09T #1 COM ISOLATED PORT TO PRINTER OR REMOTE COMMAND SYSTEM. ftXo 121 130 EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Issue 5 Literature Sheet #85010-0095 Page 3 of 4 S EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact EST. O 2000 (ST Printed in U.S.A. Page 4 of 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0095 Issue 5 EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY COMMUNICATIONS Modem Communicator Model:- 3'.MODCOMr3-MODCOMP at u re s a Listed forfire, security and access control U V.32bis 14.4K full duplex modem U Digital alarm communicator transmitter supporting: SIADCS protocol, Contact ID protocol, 3/1 and 4/2 pulse format protocol Supports "tap" alphanumeric pager protocol I Fully programmable messages a Alarm override of upload/download 33 Two phone line capability a Field upgradable firmware A Split and multiple reporting to as many as 80 different receivers U 255 subscriber accounts a Supports control/display modules a Supervised by the network controller The Modcom provides an enhanced level of survivability in the event of a network CPU failure by notifying the Central Monitoring Station of the failure and entering a degraded mode of operation. In degraded mode, the Modcom can transmit a default fire alarm message during a fire alarm condition. Two versions of the Modcom are available: n 3-MODCOM - Has an internal V.32bis 14.4K baud full duplex modem. The modem permits upload and download of system - data remotely via a telephone line. In addition, the 3-MODCOM has a Digital Alarm Communications Transmitter (DACT) or dialer function thattransmits network status information to Central Monitoring Stations (CMS) via telephone. Four DACT protocols are available: Digital Communicator Standard (DCS) "SlAforma" Dialer- 300 baud format, which transmitsalphanumericsytern status data to the CMS; ContactlD; - a S1A 3/1 dialer; and, - 4. SIA 4/2 dialer. - Alarm code content is determined by system rules. 3-MODCOMP—ln addition to all modern and dialer (DACT)- functions of the 3-MODCOM, the 3-10116OCOMP dii paging systems using Telelocator Alphanumeric Protocol (TAP)-- Alphanumeric system data can be sent to a singli-pag-er or group(s) of pagers. Some pager services can forward messages via e-mail and Fax. Description The Modem Communicator is a two-way local rail module that performs a variety of off-premise communications functions for the EST3 system. Using the latest in digital signal processing (DSP) techniques, the Modcom provides off premise communication features unavailable on any other system. The module has provisions for supervising two loop-start - telephone lines. The module features a modular jackfortelephone line connections. The Modcom's configuration and firmware can also be updated from any network node. Modcom series modules occupy a single local rail space and can be mounted in any node on the network. Any EST3 Control/ Display module can be mounted on the face of a Modcom series module. Power for the Modcom is supplied by the EST3 system supply. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY US. SALES: SARASOTA. FL 941-7394638; FAX 941-727-1214 • CANADA SALES: OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-2430; FAX 519,37&7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES: 905-270-1711; FAX 905-270-9553 • COWORATE HEADQUARTERS: CHESHIRE. CT • U.S. MANUFACTURING: PITTSFIELD. ME Issue 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0107 Page 1 of 4 Not to be used for installation purposes. - - --_-.. ,,r,.-4ete.' visit www.est.net eltiple Priority— - Each Modcom can buffer up to 500 events in its event queue. It .eviews all active events in the queue and identifies the highest priority event and dials the associated receiver. When the receiver is contacted, the MODCOM will transmit the highest priority message forthat receiver. If the message is successfully received, the MOOCOM identifies the next highest priority message and the process repeats. Phone Une Friendly The Modcom series has been designed for installation on the same phone lines with other devices such as phones and faxes. The module makes its first dial out attempt on either of the two phone lines that is not in use. This prevents unnecessary interruption of calls in progress by the line seizure relays. In the event that both lines are busy, the module seizes line one. A fixed DACT testing time can be set at an off-hour, e.g. 2:00am, again minimizing interruptions and phone line costs. The call time is programmable, and allows testing of the DACT with the central station. The Modcom series also has the ability to detect Type 1, Type 2 and Type 3 distinctive ringing patterns, permitting itto share its phone lines with other devices and still have a unique phone number for incoming modem calls. Appicaton Engineering Specification The system shall provided an off premise communications module capable of transmitting system events to multiple Central Monitor- ing Station (CMS) receivers. The module shall provide the CMS with point identification of system events via 4/2, Contact ID or SIA OCS protocols. <The module shall also be capable of transmitting alphanumeric system activity by event to a commer- cial paging system using TAP Pager protocol.> The dialer shall have the capability to support up to 255 individual accounts and to send account information to eighty (80) different receivers, each having a primary and secondary telephone access number. System events shall be capable of being directed to one or more receivers depending on event type or location as specified by the system designer. The module shall have a degrade mode capable of transmitting fire alarm signals to the CMS in the event of system CPU failure. The module shall provide a high speed (V.32b1s or greater) modem function in order to upload and download system data to/from a remote location. Ordering Information Catalog Description Shipping WI. Number lb (kg) 3-MODCOM Modem/Dialer (DACT) version .5 (.23) 3-MODCOMP Modem/Dialer (DACT) w/IAP .5 (.23) Pager Protocol Multiple Modcoms per Network Sultiple Modcoms can be installed in a single cabinet or located nodes throughoutthe network to provide added availability and enhanced redundancy of off premise communications. Multiple Receiver Capability In large system applications the EST3 system may be partitioned such that it supports a number of different customers, each using different Central Monitoring Stations and/or paging companies. The Modcom can accommodate up to 255 different accounts using up to 80 different receivers. The Modcom supports split reporting, a process where the system directs the Modcom to send some events or event types to one receiver, and different events to alternate receivers. The module's multi-dial reporting capability permits art individual event to be transmitted to multiple receivers, including pagers. Remote Data Upload/Download The modem permits data to be downloaded into the memories of the various components making up an EST3 system. Data can be - remotely uploaded and downloaded for use with the EST Access Control Database Program. In the event that an alarm is received - .,___......l.....J .. *1..... IA..-..-... ,..,+,......i4,-.,,II., ouring UIOdU1UOWIIIUdU act IVILy, LI I IVIUUL.JI II UUJII IUI'..eOY - -. terminates the call and transmits the alarm events tOthe - - appropriate receivers. When completed sending the events, the - - download will continue where it left off. -- - EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Page 2 of 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0107 Issue 4 Not to be used for installation purposes. Specifications Agency Listings UL, FCC Part 68/ CFR 47, ULC. See Note 1. Installation Takes up one LRM space in 3-CHAS7 Input Power 24 Vdc @ 60mA standby, 90 mA active Modem Protocol ITU -V.32b1s 14.4K baud full duplex using standard PC modem compatible data Dialer Protocol SIA 3/1 (format P2) and 4/2 (format P3): 20 pulses per second, double round Contact ID (DTMF format) Digital Communications Standard (DCS) SIA format: Level 2 (300 baud, Bell 103) Pager Protocol (3-MODCOMP only) Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol (TAP). Version 1.8. 300 baud, Bell 103 Telephone Dialing Connector Pulse or Tone (DTMF) Two 8-position modular phone jacks CMS Telephone Numbers Quantity Available Digits Two per receiver - 160 max. Up to 24 digits per number Receivers Supports up to 80 individual receivers. Event Buffer 500 events Operating Environment 32°F (0°C) to 120°F (49°C), 93% RH Non-condensing Receivers Tested Format Manufacturer Model Receiver Card 4/2 and 3/1 Ademco 685 685-1 or 685-8 FBI (Fire Burglary Instruments) CP220 Osborne-Hoffman 0H2000 Radionics D6600 Silent Knight 9000 9032 Sur-Gard MLR2, SG-SLR MCDI TLR. TLR+ Contact ID Ademco 685 685-8 Osborne-Hoffman 0H2000 Sur-Gard MLR2, SG-SLR Radionics D6600 Silent Knight 9000 9032 MCDI TLR, TLR+ SIA DCS Sur-Gard MLR2. SG-SLR Note 1: The EST3 is modularly listed under the following standards: UL 864 categories: UOJZ, UOXX, UUKL and SYZV, UL 294 category ALVY, UL 609 category AOTX, UL 636 category ANET, UL 1076 category APOU, UL 365 category APAW, UL 1610 category AMCX, UL 1635 category AMCX ULC-S527, ULC-S301, ULC-S302, ULC-S303, ULC-S304, ULC-S306, ULC/0RD-C1 076 and ULC/ORD-C693 Please referto EST3 Installation and Service Manual for complete system requirements. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, Issue 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0107 Page 3 of 4 Not to he iispri for installation ourooses. øypica! Wiring SURGE PREMISES PHONES (GREEN) RJ3IX TO PHONE #2 8 PINMODULAR (WIRED SAME AS CONNECTOR FOR PHONE LINE #1) PHONE UNE#1 4 5 RJ31X [ 8 PIN MODULAR CONNECTOR FOR PHONE LINE #2 at NO 1-TAPS PERMITTED %7Ft. A flU (2.13M)La\ 4' 4' Notes: UI LE2 1 Connect Line 1 and Line 2 to RJ31X or RJ38X MOOCOM (CA31A or CA38A in Canada) telephone jacks (front sew) installed by an authorized telephone company © representative. Jacks (not supplied) must be II II installed within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of the panel. 2 Phone Cord (P/N 360137) supplied) is • supervised and non-power limited. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact EST. Q 21 EST Pflnted in U.S.A. Page 4 of 4 Literature Sheet #B5010-0107 Issue 4 Not to be used for installation purposes. SECURITY/ACCESS CONTROL fl Security/Access Control Module Model: 3-SAC Listed for fire, security, and access control U Two supervised RS-4.85 device circuits Class A configuration supports 30 Card reader controllers and/or keypad/displays Class B configuration supports 52 card reader controllers and/or keypad-displays 2 4,000 ft (1,220 m) max circuit length U EST3 local rail module U Supports contro Lfdisplay modules Supervised by the network controller I 100% digital communication U Removable field wiring terminal block Description The 3-SAC Security/Access Control Module is key component in the true integration of security and access control functions into the EST3 multiplexed life safety system. The 3-SAC is the demarcation point between fire and security/access functions. For jurisdictions requiring independent wiring of fire and security devices, the 3- SAC offerstwo independentcircuits. Wherefire and security devices are permitted to be connected to the same circuit, both circuits can support both fire and security functions. All security devices that connectto a 3-SAC are designed and tested to strict fire alarm standards. For example, to enhance reliability, the 3-SAC can be wired in a Class A (Style 6) configuration, thus delivering an additional level of system survivability over traditional systems employing Class B wiring. The 3-SAC can be used in combination with the Modcom Modern- Communicator. The Modcom's dialer (DACT) function is used to transmit alarms to one or more central monitoring stations and/or paging terminals. Additionally, information received by the Modcom can be downloaded through the 3-SAC to individual security/access devices. Please refer to the Modcom catalog sheet for additional details Total integration of the EST3 system assures that processing of fire alarm signals always receives the highest priority over routine signal processing. Power1or the 3-SAC comes from the same highly reliable power supply/battery combination used to powc.fhe fire alarm components. Any Control Display module will mount in front of the 3-SAC, allowing great flexibility of the system user interface layout. Application The 3-SAC is used to connect the Card Reader Controllers and Keypad Displays to the EST3 network. This permits the network to perform functions network-wide in response to fire and/or security events. A common example is the network's ability to unlock specified doors in the event of a fire emergency, withoutthe need for hardwired interconnections between fire and access control components. The 3-SAC and a simple program rule are all that is required to unlock the doors. Want to disarm security partitions automatically when an authorized cardholder enters the building, the 3-SAC and another system rule provide a simple solution. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY US. SALES: SARASOTA, FL941-7394638; FAX 941-727-1214 • CANADA SALES: OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-2430; FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES: 905-270-1711; FAX 905-270-9553 • CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS: CHESHIRE, CT US. MANUFACTURING: PITISFIELD & NEWPORT. ME Issue 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0109 Page 1 of 2 Not to be used for installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates, visit www.est.net S _ T. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY ENCLOSURES AND WALLBOXES - - Compatibility 9 EST3 EST3 Cabinets and Chassis sallellStstllttlll Models: 3-CAB series, 3-RCC series, 3-CHAS7 series f e Right or left hand hinging of doors Lag and Keyway holes for quick mounting Attack rated door for security applications a Knockouts for 3/4 inch conduit a Attractive contour door design on lobby enclosures a Combination flush or surface mounting lobby enclosure design Remote closet cabinets for electrical closet mounting support up to 65 AMP hour batteries Description Lobby enclosure waliboxes are manufactured from #14 AWG cold rolled steel with a gray baked enamel finish. Lobby enclosure doors are manufactured from #14 AWG cold rolled steel and have a modern contoured door design with integral viewing window. The exception is the small lobby enclosure 3-CAB5. The 3-CAB5 wallbox and non-contoured door are #16 AWG cold rolled steel. Lobby enclosure doors come with gray baked enamel or optional red baked enamel finishes. The EST3 lobby enclosures back boxes, doors and chassis units are ordered and shipped separately. The 3-CAB5 lobby enclosure comes complete with door and back box providing space to mount five local rail modules. The EST3 remote closet cabinet design allows the installation of control panel electronics in electrical closets. The remote closet cabinets have left hand hinged doors and are available with red finish only. Optional display modules used for system diagnostics display, mount behind the closet cabinet door and are not visible with the door closed. Application Lobby Enclosures - - EST3 lobby enclosures provide space for control, monitoring and display modules. Ideal for mounting in lobby's where appearance is important, maximum mounting flexibility is provided with doors 3-RCC Series 3-CAB Series CE K' that will mount for right or left hand opening. Lobby enclosures come in several sizes to match individual project requirements. The 3-CAB5 series semi-flush or surface mounts. A built in rail assembly provides space for up to five local rail modules, no chassis assembly needed. Back space for 1-1/2 footprints gives room for a power supply and a 1/2 footprint module and 10 AH batteries. The local rail module spaces provide room for amplifiers, common control and annunciation modules. The 3-CAB7 semi-flush or surface mounts and has a contoured front door with viewing window. Space is provided for two 17 AH batteries and one chassis assembly providing seven local rail module spaces. The 3-CAB14 semi-flush or surface mounting and has a contoured front door with viewing window. Space is provided for two 17AH batteries and two chassis assemblies each providing seven local rail module spaces. The 3-CAB21 semi-flush or surface mounts and has a contoured front door with viewing window, Space is provided for two 17AH batteries and three chassis assemblies each providing seven local rail module spaces. Remote Closet Cabinets Remote closet cabinets àvide an economical way of installing equipment in locations where esthetics are not paramount, like electrical closets. You can have optional display modules used for system diagnostics display mounted behind the front door. These display modules will not be visible with the door closed. Remote closet cabinets are surface mounting and come in sizes providing space for one to three chassis with room for standby batteries. A - - UL Listed attack rated door having a 2-minute rating is available for the 3-RCC7R cabinet. This door is required for security applications. S EST3 has a wide selection of cabinet arrangements allowing the greatest use of EST3'sflexible modular design. From the elegant contoured door design of the lobby enclosure through the standard design of remote closetcabinets both aesthetics and function are easily addressed. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY US. SALES: SARASOTA FL 941-7394M; FAX 941-727-1214 • CANADA SALES: OWEN SOUND. ON 519-376-2430; FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNA11ONAL SALES: 905-270-1711; FAX905-270-9553 • CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS: CHESHIRE, CT • US. MAt'4UFCTURING: PWISFIELD, ME Issue 8 Literature Sheet #85010-0067 Page 1 of 4 Not to be used for installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates, visit www.est.net Ordering Information Equipment Ship Wt. Catalog Number Description I- Mounting Space I Battery Space lb. (Kg) Lobby Enclosures - Outer doors with viewing window Five local rail modules 3-CABs Cabinet w/Wallbox, door and chassis One footprint and 1/2 Two - 12V10A footprint module 30 (13.6) 3-CAB7B Wallbox only Four - 6V8A One Chassis Two - 12V10A 3-CAB713-E Wallbox only, EN-54 certified CE Two - 12V17A 3-CAB7D(R) Inner and outer doors for 3-CAB7B N/A 10(4.5) 3-CAB7D(R)-E Inner & outer doors for 3-CAB7B, EN-54 certified CE 3-CAB14B Wallbox only Four-6V8A Two Chassis Two - 12V10A 42 (19.1) 3-CAB148-E Wallbox only, EN-54 certified CE Two - 12V17A 3-CAB14O(R) Inner and outer doors for 3-CAB14B N/A 15(6.8) 3-CAB14D(R)-E Inner & outer doors for 3-CAB14B, EN-54 certified CE 3-CAB2IB Wallbox only Four-6V8A Three Chassis Two - 12V10A 55 (25) 3-CAB2113-E Wallbox only, EN-54 certified CE Two - 12V17A 3-CAB21D(R) Inner and outer doors for 3-CAB2I8 N/A 20(9.1) 3-CAB21D(R)-E Inner & outer doors for 3-CAB21B, EN-54 certified CE Remote Closet Enclosure - No viewing window Four - 6V8A 3-RCC7R Red wallbox and door Two - 12V10A ___________ One Chassis Two - 12V17A 37.5 (17) 3-RCC7R-E Red wallbox and door, EN-54 certified CE Two - 12V50A ATCK Attack rated door for 3-RCC7R N/A 26(11.8) I -RCC14R Red wallbox and door Two Chassis Four - 6V8A Two - 12V1OA 53 (24) 3-RCC14R-E Red wallbox and door, EN-54 certified CE Two Chassis Two - 12V17A .3-RCC21R Red wallbox and door Three Chassis L~K Two - 12V50A 3-RCC21R-E Red wallbox and door, EN-54 certified CE Three Chassis Two - 12V652 Chassis Assemblies 3-CHAS7 Chassis Assembly -Takes one chassis space in wallbox, provides seven local rail module spaces, 8.4 (3.8) space for up to two power supplies and a 1/2 footprint module. 3-ASU Chassis Assembly - Takes one chassis space in wallbox, provides an audio source unit 15(6.8) 'w_ microphone door fillerplate. _and _an_inner 3-ASU/4 Chassis Assembly —Takes one chassis space in wallbox, provides an audio source unit 15(6.8) /w microphone and four local rail module spaces. 3-ASU/FT Chassis Assembly—Takes one chassis space in wallbox, provides an audio source unit -: 20 (9.1) /w microphone and Firefighters Telephone 3-FTCU Chassis Assembly - Takes one chassis space in wallbox, provides Firefighters Telephone Control unit an 15(6.8) in door filler plate. Accessories 3-BATS f: Battery Shelf for RCC Enclosures. Takes one chassis space. - Room for up to one 65 AH or two 50 AH batteries. -a:BTsEN " Battery sensor/distribution module - .5(.2)- 3-TAMP Tamper switch for 3-CAB7, 3-CAB14 and 3-CAB21 cabinets. Mounts to side of cabinet. - .5 (2) 3-TAMP5 Tamperswitch for 3-CABS. to_ side cabinet. _Mounts _of 3-TAMPRCC 3-TAMPRCC Tamper Switch for RCC series cabinets. Mounts to side of cabinet. - Notes All lobby enclosures wallboxes and doors have a textured gray enamel finish outer doors are available in red b ãddtjThiuThTiii R" to the catalog number, i.e. 3-CAB7DR Remote closet cabinets will support 65 AH batteries with the use of the 3-BATS Battery Shelf, which rduós t1ié ricli5siii pissFs capacity by one chassis. - -The EST3 is modularly listed under the following standards: - S - - UL 864 categories: UOJZ, UOXX, UUKL and SYZV, UL 294 category ALVY, UL 609 category AOTX, UL 636 category ANET, UL 1076 category APOU, UL 365 category APAW, UL 1610 category AMCX, UL 1635 category AMCX - ULC-S527, ULC-S301, LJLC-5302, ULC-S303, ULC-S304, ULC-5306, ULC/ORD-C1076, ULC/ORD-C693 - - Please refer to EST3 Installation and Service Manual for complete system requirements. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Page 2 of 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0067 Issue 8 Not to be used for installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates, visit www.est.net Installation and Mounting (- 14.0 in (35.56 cm) — Lobby Enclosure 12.7 in (32.26 cm) — 3.1 in 3CAB5B (-10.9 in (27.69 cm) (7.87 cm) K-1.5 in 1.3 in — IE-. ,[i8l cm) (3.30 cm) iKNocKci 1' FOR 3W CONDUIT I (1.9uii) TOP VIEW OUTER DOOR 3.86 in 16.4 in (41.66 cm) 2.6 in (9.80 cm (6.6 cm) -, 3.86 in (9.80 cm) 1.65 in (4.19 cm) 8 8 BACKBOX BATTERY AREA )O NOT INSTALL CONDUI S Lobby Enclosures 3-CAB7B 4-- 24.12Ln(6O.9n) 22.75 N(57.8a) 3-CAB14B V-7 an) l5N(3.18) ii - 3CAB21B (3.18 Win ) f(9.80aC.) 1.656. 3.86 In II.Ic) ctessis BAERY AREA DO NOT NSTNJ. CONDUIT i-I 1.226. (3.16 o.) IL EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Issue 8 Literature Sheet #85010-0067 Page 3 of 4 Not to be used for installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates, visit www.est.net (I, a. 0 m OB CL cg OM - 0. D c' > Dm M c,• CD a :1 33 Q .2 4 o m Lt th C) I g o•) Z m 0 CD 0 C) po• cn. ID = o 0 3-RCC14 38fl(9178cm) 23.875 in(6064cm) § .125 L 5. 3 RCC2I 48.375 In (122 87 cm) I I t I II * I C•) C•) 05 66 66 so "It I I 3-RCC7 23.25 In (59.10 cm) 3.RCC14 8547 in (90.10 cm) 9 3-11CC2I 41.72 In (121.21 cm) 23.95 In (60.83 cm) fi ) 36.2 in (51.85 cm) H. co?, 0 cn /f EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY ACCESSORIES Rechargeable Valve Regulated Sealed Lead-Acid Batteries Features U Rechargeable U Non-spillable U Non-hazardous Low maintenance U High energy density Description Rechargeable sealed lead-acid batteries are ideal for use as a . secondary (standby) power source as defined by NFPA 72. Their low maintenance and high energy density make them ideal for fire alarm signaling applications. Safety Information Due to a battery's low internal resistance and high power density, high levels of short circuit current can develop across battery terminals. Put on protective eye covering and remove all jewelry before working on batteries. Do not rest tools or cables on the battery, and only use insulated tools. Follow all manufacturers installation instructions and diagrams when installing or maintaining batteries. Specifications Case Material ABS Thermoplastic Regulatory DOT Class 60, Batteries, non-hazardous, Information non-spillable Operating 32° F to 1200 F (00 C to 490 C) Environment 0 to 93% RH, Non-condensing Ordering Information Catalog Number Description Weight lb (kg) 12V1A2 1.2 Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery - 12 Vdc 1.25 (0.57) 12V4A 4.5 Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery - 12 Vdc 5(2.27) 12V6A5 7.2 Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery - 12 Vdc 6(2.72) 6V8A 8 Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery -6 Vdc 4(1.81) 6V10A 12 Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery -6 Vdc 5(2.27) 12V10A 11 Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery - 12 Vdc 10 (4.45) 12V17A 18 Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery - 12 Vdc 13 (5.90) 12V24A 26 Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery - 12 Vdc 20 (9.07). 12V40A 40 Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery - 12 Vdc 32 (14.51) 32V50A 50 Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery - 12 Vdc 40 (18.14) 12V65A 165 Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery - 12 Vdc 1 49 (22.23) Application When multiple power supplies are provided, each power supply's battery requirements should be calculated individually. Consultthe specific system manual to determine battery capacity require- men EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY US. SALES: BRADENTON, FL888-378-2329; FAX 86&803-3996 • CANADA SALES: OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-2430; FAX 519-376-7258 lNTERNATlONALSALES: 905-276-1711; FAX 905-270%M • CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS: CHESHIRE, CT • USMAMJFPCThRING: PITISFIELDS NEWPORT, ME Issue 3 Literature Sheet #85010-0127 Page 1 of 2 Not to be used for Installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates visit www.est.net. - EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY It Is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact EST. © 2004 EST Punted in USA (onqin) Page ,2 of 2 Literature Sheet 085010-0127 Issue 3 Not to be used for installation purposes. For the most current literature and updates visit www.est.net. A product of EST Marketing, Bradenton, Fl. Ordering Information Catalog I Description I Shipping Wt. Number I lb (kg) 3tSNf' IBattery Distribution Bus 1 Battery Distribution Unit Model: 3-BTSEN Features 31 50 Amp circuit breaker .. 24 Vdc power distribution bus Description The 3-BTSEN consists of a circuit breaker and copper bus bars mounted on a sheet metal bracket. The unit provides a backup battery bus for supplying backup powertoultiple power supplies fed by a common battery. The 3-BTSEN features a 50 Amp circuit breaker to protect the backup battery. The 3-BTSEN mounts in the BC-1 Battery cabinet or any EST3 "RCC° series enclosure. • Apphcation The 3-BTSEN is designed to protect and distribute standby 24 Vdc from a large common battery to multiple power supplies in on EST3 cabinet. Specifications Agency Listings UL, ULC, Mounting BC-1 or °RCC Series" enclosures Power Rating 50 Amps @ 24 Vdc Power Bus Connections #10-32 machine screws Operating Environment 32°F (0°C) to 120°F (49°C), 93% RH, non-condensing Engineering Specification Where a remote battery cabinet is required to house large standby batteries for the fire alarm system cabinet, the remote battery cabinet shall be equipped with a circuit breaker and distribution bus. to imagination at work www.gesecurtg.com 8985 TOWN CENTER PARKWAY, BRADENTON, FL 34202 PHONE: 888-378-2329 • FAX: 866-503-3996 CANADA SALES:OWEN SOUND. ON 519-376-2430; FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES. 001)905-270-1711; FAX 001)905-270-9553 Literature Sheet 85010-0111 Issue 1.1 Not to be used for installation purposes. Page 1 of 2 NOT TO BE USED FOR INSTALLATION PURPOSES, Allowable Wire Distance Per Pair Between Remote Battery Cabinet and Power Supplies Number of Wire Size #18AWG #16AWG #14AWG #12AWG supplies fed by wiring (0.75mm2) (1.0mm2) (1.5mm2) (2.5mm2) 8.84 ft 14ff 22.4 ft 35.4 ft 1 (2.7m) (4.27m) (6.83m) (10.79m) 4.43 ft 7 f 11.2 ft 17.7 It 2 (1.35m) I (2.13m) (341) (5.4M) *pica1Wirinq_____ Backup Battery Bus Wiring — To Booster 2 + and Booster Li + and Booster 1 Black , - _/ Red Mounting Side View Enclosure COVER 3-BTSEN n www.gesecuritg.com It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact GE Security. © 1999 GE Security Printed in USA Page 2of2 titer WreSheet#85010-Oi1i • issue Li 0 i magination at work EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Part of GE Security CONTROL AND ANNUNCIATION 77'71,7 7-7f— Compatibility 4 EST3 Remote Annunciators Model: 3-ANNCPU3, 3-LCDANN, 3-6ANN, 3-10ANN, 3-EVXXX Features LCD Annuniator has graphical display supporting up to 168 characters Displays information important to the user first. First and lost alarm display hands free. LCD uses queues to sort events If Variety of wallbox configurations Size the annunciator to the application l Programmable LEDflash rates Slide in labels Makes customization for regional language easy Full line of driver boards for graphic annunciators Description The EST3 system supports a full range of annunciator options. Annun- ciator cabinets are constructed from 16 gauge cold rolled steel. The gray textured enamel finish of the annunciators complements any decor. Both surface and semi-flush mounting cabinet configurations maximize mounting flexibility and esthetic appeal. Cobinetarrange- ments allow both LED and LCD annunciation to easily combine in a single enclosure. Slide in labeling for LEDs and switches provides designation flexibility for labeling in local languages. For graphic annunciation EST3 offers LED driver boards perfectly suited to operate in most graphic annunciators. Application: Use EST3 remote annunciators when a compact system status display is needed. Annunciator configurations include: LCD only display, LED only displays or combination LED and LCD display in a single enclosure. The LCD display uses the 3-LCD Liquid crystal display module. The 3- LCD has a 128x64 ggphical display typically used to display eight lines of 21 charadéró'it-LCD display providing the room needed to conveyeerencyinforrndtiön in a useful format EL1Lai ii 3-6 ANN Complies to EN54 Part 2 and 4. The 3-LCD always displays the last highest priority event even when the user is viewing other message queues. To give the greatest message flexibility EST3 event messages can route to specific annunciators. Routing can be initiated at a specific time/shift change. Messages need only display in areas having to respond to an event For LED display, the full line of EST3 Control/Display Modules support event display. Control/Display modules install over any annunciator support module maximizing annunciator design flexibility. ALamptest feature can program to any spare control switch. If a 3-LCD display is installed in the annunciator, simply operate the Alarm Silence and Trouble Silence switches simultaneously to lamptest all LEDs. Display Label Annunciator Support Module www.gesecuritg.com 8985 TOWN CENTER PARKWAY, BRADENTON, FL 34202 PHONE: 888-378-2329 • FAX: 866-503-3996 CANADA SAI.ES:OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES. (001190S-270-1711; FAX 0011905-270-9553 Literature Sheet #85010.0069 Issue 4 Not to be used for instollation purposes. Page 1014 NOT 10 BE tjE) FO q INSALLTION PLJBPOSES Ordering Information ata1og Number Description Ship Wt. lb (kg) 3 -LCDANN Remote LCD Command Module Annunciator - Comes with CPU, LCD display and doors. Order wallbox separately. 3.8(l.7) 3- ' LCDANN1 E) Remote LCD Command Module Annunciator - Comes with CPU, LCD display and doors. Order wallbox separately. EN-54 certified only, CE. 3.8(l.7) 3 - 6ANN Six Position Base Annunciator - Comes with two 3 - ANNSM annunciator support modules, a CPU, and doors. Order Display/Control modules, additional support modules & wallbox separately. 6 28 285 3-6ANN(-E) Six Position Base Annunciator - Comes with two 3 - ANNSM annunciator support modules, a CPU, and doors. Order Display/Control modules, additional support modules and wallbox separately. EN-54 certified only, CE. 6.28 (2.85) 3.10ANN 10 Position Base Annunciator - Includes two 3- ANNSM annunciator support modules, a CPU, and doors. Order Display/Control modules, additional support modules and wallbox separately. 10.5(4.8) 3-10ANN(-E) 10 Position Base Annunciator - Comes with two 3 - ANNSM annunciator support modules, a CPU, and doors. Order Display/Control modules, additional support modules and wallbox separately. EN-54 certified only, CE. 10.5 (4.8) 3-ANNCPU3 Annunciator CPU 1(.45) 3-ANNSM Annunciator Support Module .45(.2) 3-LCD Liquid Crystal Display Module .8 (.36) 3-ANNBF Blank Filler Plate .5 (.22) 3-24R 24 Red LED Display Module .35 (.12) 3-24Y 24 Yellow LED Display Module .35 (.12) 3-24G 24 Green LED Display Module .35 (.12) 3-1 2SR 12 switches with 12 Red LED Display/Control Module .35 (.12) 3-12SY 12 switches with 12 Yellow LED Display/Control Module .35 (.12) 3-12SG 12 switches with 12 Green LED Display/Control Module .35 (.12) I AW-12RY 12 Red LED and 12 Yellow LED Display Module .35 (.12) .-12/S1 GY 12 switches with one Green and one Yellow LED per switch Display/Control Module .35 (.12) .i-12/S1RY 12 switches with one Red and one Yellow LED per switch Display/Control Module .35 (.12) - 3-12/S2Y 12 switches with two Yellow LEDs per switch Display/Control Module .35 (.12) 3.6/3S 1 G2Y Six groups of three switches. Each switch with one LED. LEDs provided Green, Yellow, Yellow. .35 (.12) 3-6/3S 1 GYR Six groups of three switches. Each switch with one LED. LEDs provided Green, Yellow, Red. .35 (.12) 3-EVDVR LED/SWITCH Driver Module, For EST Graphics .35 (.12) 3EVDVRA LED/SWITCH Driver Module Assembly for Third-party Graphics .35 (.12) 3-EVPWR Power Supply for EST Graphics .5 (.22) 3-EVPWRA Power Supply Assembly c/w 19 inch rail mounting chassis assembly space for one 3-ANNCPU3 for Third-party Graphics 2.5(1.2) 3-EVDVRX Plastic mounting extrusion 19 inch mounting - Space for up to three 3-EVDVRA modules. .35 (.12) ---Enclosure Ordering Information Catalog Number Description - - Ship Wt. lb (kg) Remote Command module flush mount LCD wallbox 2.5 (1.2) RLCM/B-S Remote Command module surface mount LCD wallbox 2.5 (1.2) 3-RLCM/D Inner & outer doors for RLCM/B(-S) 2(.9) 6ANN/B Six position LED/LCD flush mount wallbox 6(2.7) position LED/LCD surface mount wallbox 6(2.7) 6ANN/B-S ------Six 10ANN/B Ten position LED/LCD flush mount wallbox 6(2.7) 10ANN/B-S Ten position LED/LCD surface mount wallbox 6(2.7) wwwgesecuritJ.com Page Zof4 Literature Sheet #85010-0069 Issue 4 lOT TO SE USED FOR INSTALLATION PURPOSES Specification Catalog Number 3-ANNCPU3 I 3-ANNSM I ° 3-LCD Agency Listings UL, ULC, FM, CE, and complies to EN54 Part 2 and 4. Mounting Space Two Spaces One Space Mounts over 3-ANNCPU Communication Format RS-485 N/A N/A Current @ 24 Vdc Standby Alarm 120 mA 140 mA lOmA 10mA 38mA 38 mA Wiring Termination Plug in terminal strip N/A N/A Wiring Size Twisted Pair 18-14 AWG (0.75-1.5 mm2) NIA N/A Max. Wire Distance 5000 ft (1524m) between N/A _any _three _panels N/A Relative Humidity 93% non condensing at 900 F (320 C) Temperature Rating 0-49° C (32- 120° F) Wiring Styles Class A or Class B Note: For a complete list of EST3 annunciator display and control modules please refer to GE Security literature sheet part number 85010-0055 A Power Iii circuit TypicaWnng Rear view 3-ANNCPU3 Field Wiring 3-6ANN Shown Z Ground Lead FZ-%. _!O To Backbox C11 CU — ToTBi 0n3-ANNCPU3 NOTES: 1. All wiring except earth ground supervised and power limited. 224 VDC available from Primary or Booster Power supply. Uses RS-485 Network communication format Network wiring Twisted Pair Wire Specifications Network Data Communications - RS485 Format Minimum Twisted Pair 18 AWG (0.75 mm2). Maximum Circuit Resistance 90 Ohms Maximum Circuit Capacitance 0.3 pF Maximum Distance between any 3 panels 5.000 ft (1,524 m). Capacitance, entire network Maximum Accumulative Capacitance Wire Size 38.41K Baud 19.2K Baud 18 AWG L4 pF 2.8 pF 16 AWG L8 pF 3.6 pF 14 AWG 2.1 pF 4.2 pF Distance limits are determined using the maximum allowable circuit resistance and capacitance, and manufacturers cable specifications. Power Riser Calculate wire size for a maximum 3.4 Vdc total line loss from the 24 - - Vdc nominal voltage. GraphicAnnunciator Field Wiring RS-485 NETWORK DATA FROM PREVIOUS PANEL 24V00 FROM 3-PPS/M OR 3-BPS/M POWER RISER 150 RE-ASS NETWORK DATA TO NEXT PANEL 24V00 TO NEXT POWER MODULE www.gesecurity.com Issue 4 Literature Sheet #85010-0069 Page 3 of 4 Semi-Flush Mounting Surface Mounting 6.12 (15.54 cm) (_(__5 GAT -) O.69• 14-7.72 (19.6 cm) 0.1 LCOANN C6iL 11(8.71 cm) 4- 7.72 (19 llo LCDANN 6ANN E aft 3. I(8 cm) II 16.1 (40.9 cm) N - ....__ 14.48 (36.78 an) -(4 I O• i 16.1(40.9cm) N I 6ANNIB-S 10 10 RE USED FOR !INSTALLATION PURPOSES. Olgineering Specification e Life Safety system shall incorporate annunciation of Alarm, Supervisory. Trouble and Monitor operations. Annunciation must be through the use of both LED display strips complete with a means to custom label each LED as to its function. Where applicable control switches must be provided. Switches with LEDs must provide positive feed back to the operator of remote equipment status. An LCD display with basic common control LEDs and switches shall be provided. The Common Control Switches and LEDs provided as minimum will be: Reset switch and LED, Alarm Silence switch and LED, Panel Silence switch and LED, Drill switch and LED. It must be possible to add additional common controls as required though the use of modular display / control units. The LCD interface must provide the ability to display custom event messages of up to 42 characters. The LCD must provide the emergency user, hands free viewing of the first and last highest priority event The last highest priority event must always display and update automati- cally. System events must automatically be placed in queues. It shall be possible to view specific event types separately. Having to scroll through a mixed list of events types is not acceptable. The total number of active events by type must be displayed. It must be possible to customize the designations of all user interface LEDs and switches for local language requirements. It must be possible to route system event messages to specific annunciator locations. Wailbox Installation and Mounting RLCMIB RLCMIB-S 23.86 (60.60 an) N 99un) i - 1OANN (4 25.4riB&7ml 61. I lPS IOANN!B IOANN!B-S www.gesecurity.com it is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We cannot cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact GE Security. © 2004 GE Security Printed in U.S.A. Page 4 of 4 Uterature Sheet #85010-0069 issue 4 -. COWAROGGYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Part of GE Security POWER SUPPLI E Corp&tibility4 QuickStart I FireShield F EST2 rST3 S Remote Booster Power Supplies Models: BPS6A and BPS10A Extends power available to Notification Appliance Circuits INACs). Provides strobe synchronization. - -- Use as auxiliary Power Supply. U Extensive UL Listings (Listed accessory under the following standards) Standard CCN , Description UL864 UO)X Fire Alarm Systems UL636 ANET, IJEHX7 Holdup Alarm Units and Systems UL609 AOTX, AOTX7 Local BurglarAlarm Units and Systems UL294 ALW, UEHX7 Access Control Systems UL365 APAW. APAW7 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm Unitsand Systems ULC-S527 U0)0C Control Units, Fire Alarm (Canada) ULC-5303 AOTX7 Local BurglarA(arrn Units and Systems(Canada) ULC-S304 AMCX7 Centruland Monitoring Station 8urglarAlorm Units (Canada) C22.2 No.205 Signaling Equipment(Canada) UL1076 APOU, APOU7 Proprietary Burglar Alarm System Units UL1610 AMCX Central Station Alarm Unit U Available in 10 amp and 6.5 amp versions. U Includes four independent 3 amp NACs -each configurable as auxiliary outputs. Configurable signal rates. to monitor and Charge batteries, control and supervise four Class 8 or two Class A NAC circuits and monitor two controlling inputs from external sources. Simple switch selection provides a wide variety of operational configu- rations. Each remote booster power supply is supplied with its own enclosure providing ample space for additional interface modules and battery compartment The Remote Booster Power Supply is available in either a 6.5 or 10 amp version @ 24 Vdc. Application The Remote Booster Power Supply provides additional powerfor audible and visual devices helping remove system capacity or site application constraints. The booster may also be used to power auxiliary, access control and security devices, in addition to fire devices. Field selectable input-to-output correlation. Fault conditions detected by the BPS will open the main panel's NAC. I Two inputs allow activation by Signature Series modules or This initiates a trouble condition and eliminates the need to wire a existing NACs. separate trouble contact back to the control panel. During alarm I NACs configure for either four Class B or two aci!cu! __ condition, detected faults are overridden and the main panel's default configuration is continuous 24 Vdcon all NACs typically used to drive - 110 Vac and 230 Vac versions visual devices. On board trouble contact is supplied for applications U On-board status LEDs fair easy recognition of Wiring faults. requiring trouble contact monitonrig. I Supports up to 24 Amp hour batteries for fire and security applica-J The booster power supply provides the capability to maximize available tions, up to 65 Amp hour for access control applications. - -power by being able to supply power for multiple services including --Access Control. Security and Fire. For security applications, space is -pTrbvFded to mount a tamper switch in the cabinet When used for Fire Description -------- Alarm notification with Genesis Notification appliances, the booster pro-vide -the-abilitytosynchronizesti-oaswellashomsignals. The The Remote Booster Power Supply is devices, or, the - supply designed to augment fire alarm audible and visual power- booster may be used to synchronize downstream devices, as well as requirements as well as provide power for auxiliary, access control and other boosters and their connected devices. Up to 10 boosters deep security applications. The booster contains all of the necessary circuits may be configured while maintaining strobe synchronization. www.gesecurity.com 8985 TOWN CENTER PARKWAY, BRADENTON, FL 34202 PHONE: 888-378-2329 • FAX: 866-503-3996 () imagination at work CANADA SALES- owEN SOUND. 0N519-376-243Q FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNA11ONALSALES (001)905-270-1711; FAX(0O1)905-270-9553 Literature Sheet #85005-0125 issue I Not to be used for installation purposes. Page 1 of 4 0 I Route AC supply through these o 06 knockouts only (Nonpower-limited and supervised) CL -CD I <1 - . I NOT r 0 BE USED FOR INSIALLATUON PURPOSES. 'S notification appliance circuits easily configure for either of two naling rates: 3-3-3 temporal or continuous. California rate is also iailable on certain models. This makes the BPS ideal for applications requiring signaling rates not available from the main panel. It also allows independent setup of a notification appliance circuitwithout interfering with the main panel and its initiating circuits. In addition to the generated signal rates, the BPS can also be configured to followthe signal rate of the main panel's notification appliance circuit This allowsseamlessexpansionof existing NACs. The BPS includes seven on-board LED indicators: one for each resident NAC; one for battery supervision; one for ground fault and, one for ac power. The trouble contact has a sixteen second delay when an ac power failure or brownout condition is detected. This reduces the reporting of troubles during short duration ac brownouts. NAC configuration options include: ac power foil delay (16 seconds or 6 hours); sensing input to NAC output correlations; and, auxiliary outputs. All NACs are configurable as auxiliary outputs. Auxiliary outputs can be always on, or off after 30 seconds without ac power. As auxiliary output, the booster may power access control and security devices. Should an overcurrent occur, the booster automatically opens the circuit The booster automatically restores the circuit when the overcurrent is removed. Jumpers configure the BPS for Class A or Class B wiring. Supply where needed EST BPS series Booster Power Supplies as an extension of Notification Appliance Circuits. The extension shall be in the form of a stand alone boaster power supply. The supply must incorpo- rate its own standby batteries. Batteries must be sized for <24>, <60> hours of standby followed by <5>. <30> minutes of alarm. It must be possible to support up to 24 Amp hour batteries. The booster supply must incorporate four independent supervised Notification Appliance Circuits. It shall be possible to configure the NACs to follow the main panel's NAC or activate from intelligent Signature Series modules. The booster NACs must be configurable to operate independently at any one of the following rates: continuous. California Rate, or 3-3-3 temporal. Fault conditions on the booster shall not impede alarm activation of host NAC circuits. The booster must be able to provide concurrent power for Notification devices, Security devices, Access Control equipment and Auxiliary devices such as door holders. The BPS must provide the ability to synchronize Genesis series strobes and horns. Power-limited wiring area 0 04— 04 -_ C S Front View 0. S > ID 0 S U) Dl o - ---All knockouts--. for 3/4 in conduit (1.9 cm) 5 ---.------ staIlation and Mounting '1 I OOi Top View D2-1 4 03 D1 . ..D2.- 17.0 in (43.2 cm) 3.5 in - - (8.9 cm) 13.0 in- (33.0 cm) 6;5 in- -- -- (16.5 cm) 3.375 in (8.6 cm) 12.Oin (30.4 cm) Notes 1. Maintain 1/4-inch (6 mm) spacing between power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring or use type FPL FPLR, or FPLP cable per ----NEC------- (21 Power-limited and supervised when not configured as auxiliary - power. Non-supervised when configured as auxiliary power. (31 Source must be power-limited. Source determines supervision. 4. When using larger batteries, make sure to position the battery. terminals towards the door. www.gesecurity.com Page 2 of 4 lIterature Sheet85OOSO12S Issue 1 101 TO 3E ED 10 NSALLA1ION PU4PO5ES Typical Wiring Single booster anywhere on a notification appliance circuit Existing NAC end-of-line resistors are not required to be installed at the booster's terminals. This allows multiple NAG Circuit ) To next signaling boosters to be driven from o single NAC circuit without the NAC Circuit \ f ___________device, booster, or EOL resistor need forspeciol configurations. V V I ° ° > NAG output #1 Fire Alarm CD CD NAG output #2 - Control Panel CD CD i ) NAG output #3 L I )NAC output #4 I I Booster Power Multiple boosters cascaded from a single _____________ I Supply notification appliance circuit To next signaling NAC Circuit 31 device. booster, or Multiple CC1(S) modules using the \J COL resistor BPS's sense inputs I CO )NAGoutput#1 NAG output #2 Fire Alarm ) NAC output #3 Control Panel I a' I NAG output #4 ° Notification appliance circuit (NAC) Booster Power l I NAC1/ + UL listed S I Supply AUX1 — EOL 15 Kc3 I To next signaling device, booster, or ,,, NAC2/ + Notification appliance circuit (NAC) CPP-03 CDRI EOL resistor AUX2 - ] I I ) NAC output #1 ' NAC3/ + j— UL listed ) NAG output #2 AUX3 — Il- EOL 15 Kt 0 ) NAG output #3 - I NAG output #4 NAC4/ + I AUX4- I Booster Power1 I 200 mAAUX — I Supply I I To )device. booster, or Continuous to — • 'lu IN Ld — + EOL resistor __ ) NAG output #1 I Sense 1 COM[ _ EOL 47K 3P NAG output #2 OUT [ 0 ) NAC output #3 IN a' ) NAG output #4 Sense 2GOM{ our l EOL 47K Booster Power NO + Supply Trouble COM NC lI ) U ID fi 109 i TB2 CC1(S)module I CC1(S)module 0 I Security and access [31 BPS EOL r 0 24 V 12 VSecurity rind device Control panel __________ BPS [1] Card reader Card readE Card reader +— controller controller + — controller [1] Disable the BPS's ground foultjumper 0133) To next device or end www.gesecurity.com Issue I Literature Sheet #85005-0125 Page 3 of 4 NOT TO SE USED TOP INSTALLATION PURPOSES. ecifications "ilodel 6.5 amp Booster 10-ampBooster AC Une Voltage, 1 2OVAC or 220-240VAC 50/601-11z 250 watts 120VAC or 220-240VAC 50/60Hz 375 watts Notification Appliance Circuit Ratings 3.0A max. per circuit @ 24Vdc nominal 6.5A max total all NACs 3.OA max. per circuit @ 24Vdc nominal 10A max total all NACs Trouble Relay 2 Mips @ 30VdC Auxiliary Outputs Four configurable outputs replace NACs 1, 2,3 or 4. as_ auxiliary outputs and dedicated 2.) _200mA _auxiliary. _(See _note Input Current (from an existing NAC) 3mA @ 12Vdc, 6mA @ 24Vdc Booster Internal Supervisory Current 70mA Signature Mounting Space Accomodates three two-gang modules. Maximum Battery Size 10 Amp Hours (2 of 12V1 OA) in cabinet up to 24 Amp hours with external battery cabinet for fire and security applications; up to 65 Amp hours for access control applications in external battery box. Terminal Wire Gauge 18-12 AWG Relative Humidity 0 to 93% non condensing @ 32°C Temperature Rating 32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C) NAG Wiring Styles Class A or Class B Output Signal Rates . Continuous, California rate, 3-3-3 temporal, or follow installed panel's NAG. (See note 1.) Ground Fault Detection Enable or Disable via jumper Agency Listings UL ULC, CSFM Notes Model BPS*CAA provides selection for California rate, in place of temporal. Maximum of 8 Amps can be used for auxiliary output. I 3rdering Information Catalog Number Description Shipping Wit lb (kg) BPS6A 6.5 Amp Booster Power Supply 13(5.9) BPS6N230 6.5 Amp Booster Power Supply (220V) 13(5.9) BPS6CAA 6.5 Amp Booster Power Supply with California rate 13(5.9) BPSIOA 10 Amp Booster Power Supply 13(5.9) BPS10A/230 10 Amp Booster Power Supply (220V) 13(5.9) BPS10CAA 10 Amp Booster Power Supply with California rate 13(5.9) Related Equipment 12V6A5 7.2 Amp Hour Battery, two required 3.4(1.6) 12V10A 10 Amp Hour Battery, two required 9.5 (4.3) 3-TAMP Tamper switch BC-1 Battery Cabinet (up to 2 -40 Amp Hour Batteries) 58 (26.4) BC-2 Battery Cabinet (up to 2- 17 Amp Hour Batteries) 19(8.6) 12V17A 18 Amp Hour Battery, two required (see note 1) 13(5.9) 12V24A 24 Amp Hour Battery, two required (see note 1) 20(9.07) 12V40A 40 Amp Hour Battery, two required (see notes 1, 2) 32 (14.5) 12V50A 50 Amp Hour Battery, two required (see notes 1, 2) 40(18.14) 12V65A 65 Amp Hour Battery, two required (see notes 1, 2) 49(22.2) Notes 1. Requires installation of separate battery cabinet. 0- BPS supports batteries greater than 24 Amp hours for access control applications only. wwwgesecurity.com It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We cannot cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications ore subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact GE Secunttj. © 2004 EST Panted in U.S.A. Page 4of4 Litetature Sheet #85005-0125 issue 1 EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Part ofGE Security INTELLIGENT INITIATING DEVICES EM Intelligent 3D Multisensor Detector Model SIGA-PHS a tu Note: Some features described here may not be supported by all control systems. Check your control panel's Installation and Operation Guide for details Integrates photoelectric smoke and 135° F (57° C) fixed-tempera- ture heat sensing technologies Non-volatile memory Automatic device mapping Electronic addressing Environmental compensation Integral microprocessor-intelligent detector Wide 0.67% to 3.77%/ft. sensitivity range Twenty pre-alarm sensitivity values, set in 5% increments' ] Identification of dirty ordefective detectors Automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment Twin RED/GREEN status LEDs Standard, relay, fault isolator, and audible mounting bases Designed and manufactured to ISO 9001 standards Description EST's Signature Series Model SlGA-PHS Intelligent 3D Multisensor Detector gathers analog information from each of its two fire sensing elements (photoelectric and heat) and converts it into digital signals. The detector's on-board microprocessor measures and analyzes these signals separately with respect to a third element - Time. We call this technology 3D. It compares the information to historical readings, time patterns, and several known fire characteristics to make an alarm decision. Digital filters remove signal patterns that are not typical of fires. Unwanted alarms are virtually eliminated. The microprocessor in each detector provides four additional benefits - Self-diagnostics and History Log, Automatic Device Mapping. Stand- alone Operation and Fast Stable Communication. Self-diagnostics and History Log - Each Signature Series detector constantly runs self-checks to provide important maintenance informa- tion. The results of the self-check are automatically updated and permanently stored in the detector's non-volatile memory. This informa- tion is accessible for review any time at the control panel. PC, or by using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/ServiceTool. 0 imagination at work ()MEA ApphCD4On Notes - ,. Aoetaue The information stored in the detectors memory includes: - detector type. serial number, and address - dote of manufacture, hours of operation, and last maintenance date - current detector sensitivity values and the extent of environmental compensation - original detector sensitivity values upon manufacturing2 - number of recorded alarms and troubles2 - time and date of last alarm' - analog signal patterns just before the last alarm' - most recent trouble code logged by the detector-32 possible trouble codes may be used to diagnose faults In the unlikely event that an unwanted alarm does take place, the control panel's history file can be called up to help isolate the problem and prevent it from happening again. Automatic Device Mapping - The loop controller learns where each device's serial number address is installed relative to other devices on the circuit. This mapping feature provides supervision of each device's installed location to prevent a detector from being reinstalled (after cleaning etc.) in a different location from where it was originally. The history log for the detector remains relevant and intact regardless of its new location. The Signature Series Data Entry Program also uses the mapping feature. With interactive menus and graphic supparLthewi red circuits between each device can be examined. Layout or as-builr drawing information showing wire branches CT-tops), device types and their address are stored on disk for printing hard copy. This takes the mystery out of the installation. Thaprepatatioaof as-builtdrawings is fast and efficient - -- - Device mapping also allows the Signotureioop coritrollerto discover: - unexpected additionadeviceaddresse - - missing device addresses------.______ -- - - changes tothewiringin the circuit.--- - 1 EST3 V.2 only. 'Retrievable with SIGA-PRO programming toot www.gesecurity.com 8985 TOWN CENTER PARKWAY, BRADENTON, FL 34202 PHONE: 888-378-2329 • FAX: 866-503-3996 CANADA SALES:OWEN SOUND. ON 519-376-243 FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES: 001) 905-270-1711; FAX (001)905-270-9553 Literature Sheet #85001-0247 Issue 6 Not to be usesi for installation purposes. Page 1 of 4 NOT TO RE US ES FOR INSTALLETION PURPOSES nd-alone Operation - A decentralized alarm decision by the ector is guaranteed. On intelligence permits the detector to ;.perate in stand-alone mode. If loop controller CPU communications fail br more than four seconds, all devices on that circuit go into stand- alone mode. The circuit acts like a conventional alarm receiving circuit Each detector on the circuit continues to collect and analyze information from its surroundings. The detector alarms if the preset smoke obscuration level is reached or the ambient temperature reaches 135°F (570C). If the detector is mounted to a relay bose, the relay operates. Similarly, if it is mounted to an audible base, the on-board horn sounds. Fast Stable Communication - On-board intelligence means less information needs to be sent between the detector and the loop controller. Other than regular supervisory polling response, the detector only needs to communicate with the loop controllerwhen it has something new to report. This provides very fast control panel response time and allows a lower baud rate (speed) to be used for communica- tion on the circuit. The lower baud rate offers several advantages including: - less sensitivity to circuitwire characteristics - less sensitivity to noise glitches on the cable - less emitted noise from the datag wiring - twisted or shielded wiring is not required. Electronic Addressing - The loop coiitroller electronically addresses each detector, saving valuable time during system commissioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required. Each detector has its own unique serial number stored in its on-board memory. The loop controller identifies each device on the circuit and assigns a "soft' address to that devices serianumber. If desired, detectors can be addressed using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. 0 vironmental Compensation - Detection sensitivity forthe SlGA-PHS virtually independent of its installed environment and its physical ndition. Environmental compensation meansthe sensing element adapts to long-term changes caused by dirt, humidity, aging etc. It even compensates for small amounts of normal ambient smoke. Approxi- mately six times every hour, the detector adjusts and updates the sensitivity 1% obscuration) base-line for its photoelectric sensing element Every hour this information is written to its permanent memory.The detector's learned" baseline is not lost, even when the detector is removed for cleaning. Signature Series environmental corn penstion is so reliable that it meets NFPA72 field sensitivity testing requirements— without the need for external meters. very little affect on the detector. The detector may be installed in rooms with ambient temperatures up to 100°F )380C). Status LEDs - Twin LEDs are visible from any direction. A flashing GREEN LED shows normal system polling from the loop controller. A flashing RED LED means the detector is in alarm state. Both LEDs on steady shows alarm state - stand-alone mode. Normal GREEN LED activity is not distracting to building occupants, but can be quickly spotted by a maintenance technician. Quality and Reliability - GE Security detectors are manufactured in North America to strict international ISO 9001 standards. All electronics utilize surface mount technology (SMT) for smaller size and greater immunity to RF noise. A conformal coating is used for humidity and corrosion resistance. All critical contacts are gold plated. iflsta]tiofl - -- Signature Series detectors mount to North American 1-gang boxes. 3- 1/2 inch or 4 inch octagon boxes, and to 4 inch square electrical boxes 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) deep. They mount to European BESA and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm fixing Centers. 0.8' (20 mm) 2.0' (51 mm) II Tamper-Resist Lever Arm f (Located on Base) Access Slot for Tamper-Resist Mechanism The detector's sensitivity setting selected by the installer floats up or down to remain constant relative to the changing baseline. This is called differential sensing. Testing& Maintenance Sensitivity Range -The SlGA-PHS 3D detector has a sensitivity range or window of 0.67% to 3.77% obscuration per foot The installer selects - Edhdtëtdi'UtOfrtatiC0llY identifieswhen itis dirty ordefective and the detector's ALARM sensitivity level from five available settings within causes a "dirty, detector message. The detector's sensitivity measure- the range ment can also be transmitted to the loop controller. A sensitivity report can beprittó tifyNFPA sensitivity measurements which must be Pre-Alarm - The detector stores one of 20 pre-alarm sensitivity values to dã[the end of the first year and every two years thereafter. alert local personnel prior to the sensor reaching a full evacuation sensitivity. Sensitivity values can be set in 5% increments' _The - usedriendlyinaintenance program shows the current state of - ------eah-deteEriridother pertinent messages. Single detectors may be Automatic Day/Night Sensitivity Selection Signature Senes a_ti control panel Availability of mainte- detectors maybe programmed for different sensitivities during night periods. This allows the detector to be more sensitive during--- .Tmaintenance (Regularor Selected) for properdetectOr operation should - unoccupied periods when lower ambient background conditions are --be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdic- expected. -tion AHJ: Refer to Current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. pltability - The SlGA-PHS 3D detector's sensitivity remains stable in wind elocities up to 5,000 ft/mm (25.3 m/sec). Ambient temperature has ST3 V.2 onI. www.gesecurity.com Page 2 of 4 Literature Sheet *85001-0247 issue 6 Norrncrlly- Noimally- Term Description 1 Not Used 2 DATA IN/OUT (+) 3 Not Used 4 DATA IN (-) 4 Remote LED (-) 5 Remote LED 6 Not Used 7 DATA OUT (-) Li MIMI I.Llt,T.1JIKO Term Description I Normally-Open 2 DATAIN/OUT(i-) 3 Cc*mut 4 DATA IN (-) 5 Not Used 6 Normally-Closed 7 DATA OUT(-) 0(11 0) I CONTACTRA]1NG I I OUT 0-) 1.O Amp @3OVDC I To Next Device (Pilot Duty) DAT L.UIJ UI (*3 From Signature Controller of PrOvIOLO Device .ax.(SirD1 seattrwUce Per see NOTE coed ion DATA IN (x) DATA Our (+) From ttralure Controter To Next Device or Previous Device ST •) B USED FOR 'USTALLATLON PURPOSES Application Although photoelectric detectors have a wide range of fire sensing capabilities they are best suited for detecting slow, smoldering fires. The table below shows six standard test fires used to rate the sensitivity of smoke and heat detectors. The table indicates that no single sensing element is suited for all test fires. GE Security recommends that this detector be installed according to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. Type of Detector - SIGA-PS SIGA-HRS and SIGA-HFS SIGAPHS S10A1PHS Test Fire SIGA-lS Ion Photo Rate-of-Rise/ Photo Heat Ion/Photo/Heat FixedTemp. 3D 40 Open Wood optimum unsuitable optimum very suitable optimum Wood Pyrolysis suitable optimum unsuitable optimum optimum Smouldering Cotton very suitable optimum unsuitable optimum optimum Poly Urethane Foam very suitable very suitable suitable very suitable optimum n-Heptane optimum very suitable very suitable optimum optimum Liquid-Fire without Smoke unsuitable unsuitable optimum very suitable very suitable Typical Wiring The detector mounting bases accept #18 AWG (0.75mm2). #16(1.0mm2), #14 AWG (1.5mm2). and #12 AWG (2.5mm2) wire sizes. Note: Sizes #16 AWG (1.0mm2) and #18 AWG (0.75mm2) are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. Standard Detector Base, SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 Relay Detector Base, SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 Isolator Detector Base, SIGA-lB, SlGA-I84 OUT C-) DATAIN(~) - - DATAOLJr(+) Rom gnature Controller - To Next Device or Previous Dèce WarningCqu -i - - — This detectorwill not operate without electrical power. As fires fre- quently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further . safeguards with your fire protection specialist This detector will NOT sense fires that start in areas where smoke or heat cannot reach the detector. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on Audible Detector Base, SIGA-AB4G volume setting 1/' Tone setting Default = High volume Default = Temporal pattern Cut for low volume a Cut for steady tDM To renfigore oxipuf rekene or tone, oUt the atorit beard as thawS. 24 Vdc in - From power supply or, previous base Data in From Signature controller or previous device * the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector to alarm it. The heat sensor in this device only provides a source of information to supplement the information provided by the photoelectric smoke sensor. The heat sensor by itself does NOT protect life against fire and smoke. DA Term Description 1 Not Used 2 DATA IN/OUT (+) 3 DATA IN (-) 4 Not Used 5 Not Used 6 DATA OUT (-) 7 Not Used 24 Vdc out To next base or EOL relay Data out To next Signature device www.gesecurity.com Issue 6 Literature Sheet #85001.0247 Page 3 of 4 OT TO 3E •J:E ;R JsrAL,\ioN PjRPO.E5 Icessories detector mounting bases have wiring terminals that are accessible am the "room-side" after mounting the base to the electrical box. The bases mount to North American 1-gang boxes and to 31h inch or 4 inch octagon boxes. 11h inches (38 mm) deep. They also mount to European BESA and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm fixing centers. The SIGA-SB4, SIGA-RB4, and SIGA-1B4 mountto North American 4 inch square electrical boxes in addition to the above boxes. They include the S (GA- 1S4 Trim Skirt which is used to cover the "mounting ears" on the b6se. The SIGA-AB4G mounts to a 4' sqare box only. Standard Base SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 - This is the basic mounting base for : SIGA-A84G SIGA-SB SIGA-IB SIGA-RB SIGA-LED Audible Base Standard Base IsolatorBasa Relay Base Remote 1.60 GE Security Signature Series detectors. The SIGA-LED Remote LED is supported by the Standard Base. Relay Base SIGA-RB, SIGA-1184 - This base includes a relay. Normally open or closed operation is selected during installation. The dry contact is rated for one amp (pilot duty) @ 30 Vdc. The relay's position is supervised to avoid accidentally jarring it out of position. The SIGA-RB can be operated as a control relay if programmed to do so at the control panel (EST3 V. 2 only). The relay base does not support the SIGA-LED Remote LED. Audible Base SIGA-AB4G - This base is designed for use where 0 olized or group alarm signaling is required. When the detector nses an alarm condition, the audible base emits a local alarm signal. The optional SlGA-CRR Polarity Reversal Relay can be used for sounding other audible bases on the same 24 Vdc circuit. Relay and Audible Bases operate as follows: - at system power-up or reset, the relay is de-energized - when a detector is installed in the base with the power on, the relay energizes for four seconds, then de-energizes - when a detector is removed from a base with the power on, the relay is de-energized - when the detector enters the alarm state, the relay is energized. Isolator Base SIGA-IB, SIGA-1134 - This base includes a built-in line fault isolator for use on Class A circuits. A detector must be installed for it to operate. The isolator base does not support the SIGA-LED Remote LED. The isolator operates as follows: - a short on the line causes all isolators to open within 23 msec. - at 10 msec intervals, beginning on one side of the Class A circuit nearest the loop controller, the isolators close to provide the next isolator down the line with power. - when the isolator next to the short doses, it reopens wn 10 msec. The process repeats beginning on the other side of the loop controller. Remote LED SIGA-LED - The remote LED connects to the SIGA-SB or SIGA-SB4 Standard Base only. It features a North American size 1-gang -- p1asticSocep1ate with a white .finish-and red alarm LED. SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt - Supplied with 4 inch bases, it can also be ordered separately to use with the other bases to help hide surface imperfec- ions not covered by the smaller bases. Specifications Catalog Number .PHS. Smoke Sensing Photoelectric - Light Scattering Principle Element Heat Sensing Fixed Temperature Element Alarms at 135°F (57°C) Ambient Operating and Operating Temp: 32°F to 100°F (0°C to 38°C) Storage Storage Temp: -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C) Environment Humidity: 0 to 93% RH, Non-Condensing Sensitivity Range UU/UL(- 0.67% to 3.77% Most Sensitive: 1.0%/ft. User Selected Alarm More Sensitive: 2.0%/ft. Sensitivity Settings Normal: 2.5%/ft. Less Sensitive: 3.0%/ft. Least Sensitive: 3.5%/ft. Pre-alarm Sensitivity 5% increments, allowing up to 20 pre-alarm settings Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc (19 Vdc nominal) Quiescent: 45#AA @ 19 V Operating Alarm: 45pA@ 19V Current Emergency Stand-alone Alarm Mode: 18mA Pulse Current: 100 pA 1100 msec) During Communication: 9 mA maximum Construction & High Impact Engineering Polymer - White Finish Compatible SIGA-SB Standard Base, Mounting Bases SIGA-RB Relay Base, SIGA-IB Isolator Base, SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G Audible Bases On-board Green LEO - Flashes when polled On-board Red LED - Flashes when in alarm LED Operation Both LEDs - Glow steady when in alarm (stand-alone) Compatible Remote Red LED (model SIGA-LED) Flashes when in alarm Compatibility Use With: SIGNATURE Loop Controller Address Uses one Device Address Requirements Agency Listings UL, ULC, CSFM, MEA UL Listed Spacing 30 ft Ordering Information Catalog Ship Wt Number Description lbs (kg) SIGA-PHS Intelligent 3D Multisensor Detector $ (.23) - ULIULC Listed Accessories SIGA-SB Detector Mounting Base SIGA-SB4 4-inch Detector Mounting Base c/w SlGA-TS4 Trim Skirt SIGA-RB Detector Mounting Base w/Relay .2 (.09) SlGA-RB4 4-inch Detector Mounting Base w/ Relay c/w SlGA-154 Trim Skirt SIGA-IB Detector Mounting Base w/Fault Isolator SlGA-1134 4-inch Detector Mounting Base w/Fault Isolator c/w SlGA-TS4 Trim Skirt SIGA-LED Remote Alarm LED SIGA-AB4G Audible (Sounder) Base .3 (0.15) SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt (supplied with 4-inch bases) .1 (.04) Compatibility The SlGA-PHS detectors are compatible only with EST's Signature Loop Controller. wwwgesecurity.com It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact GE Security. © 2004 GE Security I Printed in USA Page 4 of 4 Literature Sheet #85001-0247 Issue 6 LOWAROG SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Portal GE Security INTELLIGENT INITIATING DEVICES Intelligent Heat Detectors Models SIGA-HFS & SIGA-HRS rea cures Note: Some features described here may not be supported by all control systems. Check your control panel's Installation and Operation Guide for details 70 foot (21.3 meter) spacing 15°F 190C)/min rate-of-rise/135°F (57°C) ft. and 135°F (57°C) fixed temperaturetype 71 lntelligent detector c/w integral microprocessor Non-volatile memory Automaticdevicernapping Electronic addressing U Identification of defective detectors U Twin RED/GREEN status LEDs U Standard, relay, fault isolator, and audible mounting bases Designed and manufactured to ISO 9001 standards Description EST's Signature Series Model SlGA-HFS and SIGA-HRS Intelligent Heat Detectors gather analog information from their fixed temperature and/ or rate-of-rise heat sensing elements and converts it into digital signals. The detector's on-board microprocessor measures and analyzes these signals. It compares the information to historical readings and time patterns to make on alarm decision. Digital filters remove signal patterns that are not typical of fires. Unwanted alarms are virtually eliminated. The microprocessor in each detector provides four additional benefits - Self-diagnostics and History Log, Automatic Device Mapping, Stand- alone Operation and Fast, Stable Communication. Self-diagnostics and History Log - Each Signature Series detector constantly runs self-checks to provide important maintenance informa- tion. The results of the self-check are automatically updated and permanently stored in the detector's non-volatile memory. This information is accessible for review any time at the control panel. PC, or by using the SlGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. \\\ ETj Awilable The information stored in the detector's memory includes: - detector type, serial number, and address - date of manufacture, hours of operation, and last maintenance date' - current detector (ambient) temperature values - current detectorsensitivity and environmental compensation values - number of recorded alarms and troubles' - time and date of last alarm' - analog signal patterns just before the last alarm' - most recent trouble code logged by the detector— 32 possible trouble codes may be used to diagnose faults. In the unlikely event that an unwanted alarm does take place, the control panel's history file can be called up to help isolate the problem and prevent it from happening again. Automatic Device Mapping - The loop controller learns where each device's serial number address is installed relative to other devices on the circuit.This mapping feature provides supervision of each device's installed location to prevent a detector from being reinstalled (after cleaning etc.) in a different location from where it was originally. The history log for thedetector remains relevant and intact regardless of its new location. The Signature Series Data Entry Program also uses the mapping feature. With interactive menus and graphic support, the wired circuits between each device can be examined Layout or 'as-built" drawing information showing wire branches (T-taps), device types and their address are stored on disk for printing hard copy. This takes the - mystery out of the installation. The preparation of as-built drawings is fast and efficient I i EST3 V.2 only. Retrievable with SIGA-PRO programming toot 0 i maginati on at work wwwgesecurity.com 8985 TOWN CENTER PARKWAY, BRADENTON. FL. 34202 PHONE: 888-378-2329 • FAX: 866-503-3996 CANADA SALE&OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-243Ct FAx 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES. 1001i905-270-1711 FAX 10011 905-270-9553 uterature Sheet #85001-0243 Issue 6 Not to be used for installation purposes. PageS of 4 4.4 012 mm) ;ri.iOi D 'jPo;; 'ice mopping allows the Signature loop controller to discover. - unexpected additional device addresses - missing device addresses - changes to the wiring in the circuit Stand-alone Operation - A decentralized alarm decision by the detector is guaranteed. On-board intelligence permits the detector to operate in stand-alone mode. If loop controller CPU communications fail for more than four seconds, all devices on that circuit go into stand: alone mode. The circuit acts like a conventional alarm receiving circuit Each detector on the circuit continues to collect and analyze information from its surroundings. Both the SIGA-HRS and SIGA-HFS detectors alarm if the ambient temperature increases to 135°F (57°C) or for the SIGA- HRS only, the temperature increases at a rate exceeding 15°F (90C)! minute. If the detector is mounted to a relay base, the relay operates. Similarly, if it is mounted to an audible base, the on-board horn sounds. Fast Stable Communication - On-board intelligence means less information needs to be sent between the detector and the loop controller. Other than regular supervisory polling response, the detector only needs to communicate with the control panel when it has some- thing new to report. This provides very fast control panel response time and allows a lower baud rate (speed) to be used for communication on the circuit. The lower baud rate offers several advantages including: - less sensitivity to circuit wire characteristics - less sensitivity to noise glitches on the cable - less emitted noise from the data wiring - twisted or shielded wiring rs not required Electronic Addressing - The loop controller electronically addresses I ch detector, saving valuable time during system commissioning. tting complicated switches or dials is not required. Each detector has its own unique serial number stored in its on-board memory. The loop ;ontroller identifies each device on the circuit and assigns a 'sow address to that device's serial number. If desired, detectors can be addressed using the SlGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. Installation Spacing - The SIGA-HFS (fixed temperature) and the SIGA- HRS (fixed temperature/rate-of-rise combination) intelligent heat detectors are rated for installation at up to 70 foot (21.3 meter) spacing. These detectors may be installed in rooms with ambient temperatures up to 100°F (380C). Status LEDs - Twin LEDs are visible from any direction. A flashing GREEN LED shows normal system polling from the loop controller. A flashing RED LED means the detector is in alarm state. Both LEDs on steady shows alarm state - stand-alone mode. Normal GREEN LED activity is not distracting to building occupants, but can be quickly spotted by a maintenance technician. Quality and Reliability - GE Security detectors are manufactured in North America to strict international ISO 9001 standards. All electronics utilize surface mount technology (SMT) for smaller size and greater immunity to RF noise, A conformal coating is used for humidity and corrosion resistance. All critical contacts are gold plated. Specifications Table Catalog Number SIGA-HFS SIGA-HRS Heat Sensing Fixed Fixed & Temperature! Element Temperature Rate-of-Rise Alarms at 135°F Alarms at 135°F (57°C) Alarm Point (57°C) Ambient Ambient or Temp. increase above 15°F (9°C) per mm. UL Listed 70 feet (21.3 meters) center to center spacing Detector Spacing Operating and Operating Temp: 32°F to 100°F (0°C to 38°C) Storage Storage Temp: -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C) Environment Humidity: 0 to 93% RH, Non-Condensing Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc (19 Vdc nominal) Quiescent: 45pA @ 19 V Operating Alarm: 45pA @ 19V Current Emergency Stand-alone Alarm Mode: 18mA Pulse _Current: _100 pA_(100_msec) Construction & High Impact Engineering Polymer - White Finish SIGA-SB Standard Base, Compatible SIGA-RB Relay Base, SIGA-181 Isolator Base, Mounting Bases SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G Audible Bases On-board Green LED - Flashes when polled On-board Red LED - Flashes when in alarm; Both LED Operation LEDs - Glow steady when in alarm (stand-alone) Compatible Remote Red LED (model SIGA-LED) Flashes when in alarm Compatibility Use With: SIGNATURE Loop Controller Address Uses one device address Requirements Agency Listings UL, ULC, MEA, CSFM Installation Signature Series detectors mount to North American 1-gang boxes. 3- 1/2 inch or 4 inch octagon boxes, and to 4 inch square electrical boxes 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) deep. They mount to European BESA and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm fixing centers. 0.8'(20 mm) 2.0'(51 mm) Compatibility The SIGA-HFS and SIGA-HRS detectors are compatible only with EST's Signature Loop Controller. . (Located on Base) Access Slot for Tamper-Resist Mechanism www.gesecurity.com Page 2 of 4 Literature Sheet #85001-0243 Issue 6 IE FJR !NTALLAON °UR.)SE Apftcation The table below shows six standard test fires used to rate the sensitivity of smoke and heat detectors. The table indicates that no single sensing element is suited for all test fires. GE Security recommends that this detector be installed according to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. Test Fire Type of Detector SIGA-IS Ion SIGA-PS Photo SIGA-HRS and SIGA-HFS Rate-of-Rise/ Fixed Temp. SIGA-PHS Photo Heat 3D SIGA-IPHS Ion/Photo/Heat 4D Open Wood optimum unsuitable optimum very suitable optimum Wood Pyrolysis suitable optimum unsuitable optimum optimum Smouldering Cotton very suitable optimum unsuitable optimum optimum Poly Urethane Foam very suitable very suitable suitable very suitable optimum n-Heptane optimum - very suitable very suitable optimum optimum Liquid Fire without Smoke unsuitable unsuitable optimum very suitable very suitable TyphcWring The detector mounting bases will accept #18 AWG (0.75mm2), #16(1.0mm2), #14 AWG 11.5mm21. and #12 AWG (2.5mm2) wire sizes. Note: Sizes #16 AWG (1.0mm2) and #18 AWG 10.75mm21 are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. Standard Detector Base, SlGA-SB, SIGA-S84 Relay Detector Base, SIGA-R8, SIGA-RB4 - Normally- Normally- DATA IN (-) DAT L.OUT C-) Remote LED (SIGA-LED) Max. Resistance per Wire *-4- Must NOT Exceed IOU Term Description I NotUsed 2 DATAIN/OUT(+) 3 Not Used 4 DATA IN(-) 4 Remote LED (-) 5 Remote LED (-,-) 6 Not Used 7 DATAOUT(-) Term Description 1 2 Nonon DATA IN/OUT () 3 Conrxm 4 DATA IN 5 Not Used 6 Noonally-Closed 7 DATAOUT(-) CONTACT RATiNG 1.0 Amp @ 30 VDC (Pilot Duty) OUT (-) DATA IN 1)P,l/k OUT f,+) DATA IN urwO4JT(+) .. 01... .. To Nest Device ,.,..... .. To Next Device null. o.yi lulue ¼.Lfl l..unw. nun. ayi ,s.11ure L4J1 aLlow, or Previous Device or Previous Device Isolator Detector Base, SIGA-IB, SlGA-184 ----_------------ Audible Detector Base, SIGA-AB4G Term Descnption - 70 /\\ 1 Not Used .- - DATAINIOUT(47 - - - - Volume setting Default = High Tone setting 2 volume (1 3 DATAIN(-)-.- - ---- Cut for low volume Default = Temporal pattern Cut for steady tone ° °.. . 0 6 DATAOUT(-) o -7... Not Used - ___________-•-•-- Tolgweoolpotvohimo the chcaitbowd DATAIN(-) DATAOUT(-)'.. cr o,thne,od as shown. 24 Vdc in - Prose power SUPPlY or ' 24Vdc out previous base To next base or EOL relay DATA IN (+) DATA OIJI(~) From Signature Controller To Next Device - Data in __________ From Signature ountToller or Data - ut or Previous Device previous device * To next Signature device www.gesecuritg.com Issue 6 literature Sheet #85001-0243 Page 3 of 4 O OR ,IA.LPSiON PURPOSES. S cessories ,detector mounting bases have wiring terminals that are accessible from the 'room-side" after mounting the base to the electrical box. The bases mount to North American 1-gang boxes and to 31h inch or 4 inch octagon boxes. 11h inches (38 mm) deep. They also mount to European BESA and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm fixing centers. The SIGA-SB4, SlGA-RB4. and SIGA-184 mount to North American four inch square electrical boxes in addition to the above boxes. They include the SIGA- TS4 Trim Skirt which is used to cover the "mounting ears' on the base. The SIGA-AB4G mounts to 04" sqare box only. - CC SIGA-AB4G SiGA-511 - SIGA-113 SIGA-RB SIGA-LED Audible Base Standard Base Isolator Base Relay Base Remote LED Standard Base SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 - This is the basic mounting base for GE Security Signature Series detectors. The SlGA-LED Remote LED is supported by the Standard Base. Relay Base SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 - This base includes a relay. Normally open or closed operation is selected during installation. The dry contact is rated for lamp (pilot duty) @ 30 Vdc. The relay's position is super- vised to avoid accidentally jarring it out of position. The SIGA-RB can be operated as control relay if programmed to do so at the control panel .ST3 V. 2 only). The relay base does not support the SIGA-LED Remote D. idible Base SIGA-AB4G -This base is designed for use where calized or group alarm signaling is required. When the detector senses an alarm condition, the audible base emits a local alarm signal. The optional SIGA-CRR Polarity Reversal Relay can be used for sounding Ordering Information Table Catalog Description Ship Wt. Number lbs (kg) SIGAHFS Intelligent Fixed Temperature Heat Detector -ULJULC Listed ,5(.23) srs Intelligent Fixed Temperature/Rate-of-Rise Heat Detector - UL/ULC Listed Accessories SIGA-SB Detector Mounting Base SIGASB4 4-inch Detector Mounting Base Ow SIGA-TS Trim Skirt SIGA-RB Detector-Mounting-Base wlRelay - 2 SIGARB4 4-inch Detector Mounting Base /w Relay c/wSlGA-TS--Trtni Skirt SIGA-113 Detector Mounting. Base w/Fault Isolator SIGA-164 4-inch Detector MiiiitijBiwr - - Fault Isolator 4w SIGA=TST iSkiitJ SIGA-LED Remoter Alarm LED SIGA-AB4G Audible (Sounder) Base .3(0.15) ISlGA-T54 I Trim Skirt (supplied with 4-inch bases) .1 (.04) to other audible bases an the some 24 Vdc circuit Relay and Audible Bases operate as follows: - at system power-up or reset, the relay is de-energized - when a detector is installed in the base with the power on, the relay energizes for four seconds, then de-energizes - when a detector is removed from a base with the power on, the relay is de-energized - when the detector enters the alarm state, the relay is energized. Isolator Base SIGA-18, SIGA-I134 - This base includes a built-in line fault isolator for use on Class A circuits. A detector must be installed for it to operate. The isolator base does not support the SlGA-LED Remote LED. The isolator operates as follows: - a short on the line causes all isolators to open within 23 msec - at 10 msec intervals, beginning on one side of the Class A circuit nearestthe loop controller, the isolators close to provide the next isolator down the line with power - if the isolator next to the short closes, it reopens within 10 msec. The process repeats beginning on the other side of the loop controller. Remote LED SIGA-LED - The remote LED connects to the SIGA-SB or SlGA-SB4 Standard Base only. It features a North American size 1-gang plastic faceplate with a white finish and red alarm LED. SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt - Supplied with 4 inch bases, it can also be ordered separately to use with the other bases to help hide surface imperfec- tions not covered by the smaller bases. Warnings & Cautions This detector will not operate without electrical power. As fires fre- quently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your fire protection specialist. This detector will NOT sense fires that start in areas where heat cannot reach the detector. Heat from fires in walls, roofs, or on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector to alan'n it. The heat sensor in this device only provides a source of information to supplementthe information provided by photoelectric or ionization smoke detectors which may be located nearby. The heat detector by itself does NOT provide life safety protection. Under no circum- stances should heat detectors be relied on as the sole means of fire protection. www.gesecuritg.com it is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate at requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact GE Security. O 2004 GE Security I Printed in USA Page 8 alA Literature Sheet #85001-0243 Issue 6 U Stand-alone operation - The-station inputs an alarm even if the loop controller's polling interrogation stops. I Diagnostic LEDs_ - _$tq sLEDs; flashing GREEN shows normal polling; flashing RED shows alarm state. - - -a - Designed for high ambienttemperature operation - installinornbienttemperatures up to 120°F (49°C). DéftoISO9001-standards -- I reliability:. 0 imagination at work SIGA-270 SERIES .r EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Part of GE Security INTELLIGENT INITIATING DEVICES - Manual Pull Stations ModelsSlGA-270, SIGA-270P, SIGA-278 Features Note: Some features described here may not be supported by all control systems. Check yourcontrol panel's Installation and Operation Guide fardetai!& Traditionalfamiliarappearance SlGA-270 models feature our familiar teardrop design with simple positive pull action and sturdy die-cast metal body. 11 One stage (GA). two stage (pre-signal), and double action models SlGA-270 models are available for one or two stage alarm systems. The single stage double action SIGA-278 features a rugged Lexan housing with keyed reset mechanism. il Break glass operation An up-front visible glass rod on the SIGA-270 discourages tampering. Intelligent device C/w integral microprocessor All decisions are made at the station allowing lower communication speed while substantially improving control panel response time. Less sensitive to line noise and loop wiring properties; twisted or shielded wire is not required. Non-volatile memory Permanently stores serial number, type of device, and job number. Automatically updates historic information including hours of opera- tion, lost maintenance dote, number of alarms and troubles, and time and date of last alarm. Automatic device mapping Each station transmits wiring information to the loop controller regarding its location with respect to other devices on the circuit Electronicaddressing Permanently stores programmable address; there are no switches or dials to set Addresses are downloaded from a PC, or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. SIGA-278 MEA (!E) () Patented Description The SIGA-270 and SIGA-278 series Manual Pull Stations are part of EST's Signature Series system. The SIGA-270 Fire Alarm Manual Pull Stations feature our very familiar teardrop shape. They are made from die-cast zinc and finished with red epoxy powder-coat paint comple- mented by aluminum colored stripes and markings. With positive pull- lever operation, one pull on the station handle breaks the glass rod and turns in a positive alarm, ensuring protection plus fool-proof operation. Presignal models (SIGA-270P) are equipped with a general alarm (GA) keyswitch for applications where two stage operation is required. The up-front highly visible glass rod discourages tampering, but is not required for proper operation. - EST's double action single stage SIGA- 278 station is a contemporary style manual station made from durable red colored lexan. To initiate an alarm, first lift the upper door marked UFTTHEN PULL HANDLE, then pull the alarm handle. The integral microprocessor built into each Signature Series station provides four important benefits -Self-diagnostics and History Log, Automatic Device Mapping, Stand-alone Operation and Fast, Stable - Communication. Self-diagnostics and History Log - Each Signature Series manual station constantly runs self-checks to provide important main-tenance information. The results of the self-check are automatically updated and permanently stored in the station's non-volatile memory. This information is accessible for review any time at the control panel, PC, or by using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/ServiceTool. The information stored in the station's memory includes: - station serial number, address, and type - - - www.gesecurity.com 8985 TOWN CENTER PARKWAY, BRADENTON, FL 34202 PHONE: 888-378-2329 • FAX: 866-503-3996 CANADA SALES: OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-243C FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES. b011 905-270-1711: FAX 10011 905-270-9553 Uterature Sheet #85001-0279 Issue? Not to be used for Installation purposes. Page 1 of 4 REAP VIEW Of SIGA-278 Red LED Green LED (AG,n/Acttre) (NorTnat) DATA N (*) DATA OUT (*) DATA IN (-) ,DATAOUT(-) From Signature Controter To Next DevIce or Pre*IorG Dece A Figure & Single Stage Systems REAR VIEW Of SIGA-270P. EI 1c SIGC-270PB OTh2 Pact LED Green LED (PIP,ztjve) - r - (ro,yflQ TBI 0 C3 C3 DATA IN (.) )- —4 .DATA OUT Tv) 1 DATA IN (0 >- DATA OUT 0) From Sgncture Controller To Next Device or Previous Devtce A NOT TO BE USED FOP NSTALLTION PURPOSES .dote of manufacture, hours of operation, and lost maintenance date, - number of recorded alarms and troubles' - time and dote of lost alarm' - most recent trouble code logged by the detector - 24 possible trouble codes may be used to diagnose faults. Typical Wiring The fire alarm station's terminal block accepts #18 AWG (0.75mm2) to #12 AWG (2.5mm9 wire sizes. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. Automatic Device Mapping - The loop controller learns where each Wiring Notes device's serial number address is installed relative to other devices on Referto Signature Loop Controller manual for maximum the circuit The loop controller keeps a map of the Signature Series., wire distance. / devices connected to it 2. All wiring is power limited and supervised. The Signature Series Data Entry Program also uses the mapping feature. With interactive menus and graphic support, the wired circuits between each device can be examined. Layout or rosbuilr drawing information showing wire branches (T-taps), device types and their address are stored on disk for printing hard copy. This takes the mystery Out of the installation. The preparation of as-built drawings is fast and efficient Device mapping allows the Signature loop controller to discover: - unexpected additional device addresses - missing device addresses - changes to the wiring in the circuit Stand-alone Operation - A decentralized alarm decision by the manual station is guaranteed. On-board intelligence permits the Station to operate in stand-alone mode. If loop controller CPU communications fail for more than four seconds, all devices on that circuit go into stand- alone mode. The circuitacts like a conventional alarm receiving circuit Each station will still transmit bn alarm if its operating lever is pulled. S ostStable Communication - Built-in intelligence means less informa- on needs to be sent between the station and the loop controller. Other han regular supervisory polling response, the station only needs to communicate with the loop controller when it has something new to report This provides very fast control panel response time and allows a lower baud rote (speed) to be used for communication on the circuit The lower baud rote offers several advantages including: - less sensitivity to circuitwire characteristics - less sensitivity to noise glitches on the cable - less emitted noise from the data wiring - twisted or shielded wiring is not required. DiagnosticLEDs -Twin LEDs provide visual indication of normal and alarm conditions. They are visible only when the station is removed from the mounting box. A flashing GREEN LED shows normal system polling from the loop controller. A flashing RED LED means the station is in alarm state. Both LEDs on steady shows alarm state - stand-alone mode. Quality and Reliability - GE Security modules are manufactured in North America to strict international ISO 9001 standards. All electronics utilize surface mount technology (SMT) for smaller size and greater immunity to RF noise. A conformal coating is used for humidity and corrosion resistance. ADA Compliant- Meets ADA requirements for manual pull stations. - Figure S. Two Stage Systems .EST3 V.2 only. Retrievable with SiGA- PRO programming tool. www.gesecurity.com Page 2 of 4 Literature Sheet *85001-0279 Issue 7 NOT TO RE USED FOR TISTALLATON PURPOSES Installation Single-stage Signature Series fire alarm manual pull stations mount to North American a½ inch (64 mm) deep 1-gang boxes. Two stage presignal (270P) models require 11h inch (38 mm) deep 4-inch square boxes with 1-gang, ½-inch raised covers. Openings must be angular. Rounded openings are not acceptable. Recommended box: Steel City Model 52-C-13; in Canada, use Iberville Model CI-52-C-49-112. All models include terminals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm' to 0.75 mm') wire size. GE Security recommends that these fire alarm stations be installed according to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. Electronic Addressing: The loop controller electronically addresses each manual station, saving valuabletime during system commissioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required. Each stationhas its own unique serial number stored in its on-board memory. The loop controller identifies each device on the loop and assigns a"soft' address to each serial number. If desired, the stations can be addressed using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. Key.l.atch Compatible ElectrIcal Box -• _-1 K Compatible Electrical Cover Release J. Release Screw Back Back Plate Plat. Toggle Toggle Swtfch Switch L Goss Rod Gass Rod Release Lever PEN Figure 1. SlGA-278 installation Figure 2. SIGA-270, SIGC-270F, SIGC-270B installation Cover Release Compatibility Signature Series manual stations are compatible only with EST's Signature Loop Controller. Glass Rod Release Lever Figure 3. SlGA-27013, SlGC-270PB installation Warnings & Cautions This device will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards - with your local fire protection specialist. Application The operating characteristics of the fire alarm stations are determined by- ---- theirsub-type code orPersonality Coded. NORMALLY-OPEN ALARM - LATCHING (Pesonality Code 1) is assigned by the factory; no user configuration is required. The device is configured for Class BIDC operation. An ALARM signal is sent to the loop controller when the --- - stations pull lever is operated. The alarm condition is latched at the station. www.gesecurity.com Issue 7 uterotureSheetl850010279 Page 3 of 4 Vecifications Table • SIGA-270 SGC-210F SIGA-210P Catalog Number SIGC-270B SIGC-270P8 SIGA-278 Description Single Action - One Stage Single Action -TWO Stage Double Action - One Stage Addressing Requirements Uses 1 Module Address Uses 2 Module Addresses Uses 1 Module Address Standby = 250pA Standby = 396pA Standby = 250A Operating Current p Activated = 4001iA - Activated = 680pA Activated= 400pA Construction & Finish Diecast Zinc - Red Epoxy w/Aluminum markings Lexan - Red w/White markings Type Code Factory Set Operating Voltage 152 to 19.95 Vdc (19 Vdc nominal) Operating Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) Storage and Operating Environmen Storage Temperature: -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C) Humidity: _0_to_93%_RH On-board Green LED - Flashes when polled LED Operation - On-board Red LED - Flashes when in alarm Both LEDs - Glow steady when in alarm (stand-alone) Compatibility Use With: Signature Loop Controller Agency Listings UL, ULC (note 1), MEA, CSFM Note 1: SIGC-270F, SIGC-270B and SIGC-270P6 are ULC listed only. Suffix "F indicates French markings. Suffix "B" indicates English/french bilingual markings. Ordering lnformatibn Table Description Ship Wt. lbs (kg) ('I... Stage Al,,.,., Q+.tI, SlGA-270 English Markings -UL/ULC Listed SIGC-270F One Stage Fire Alarm Station, French Markings - ULC Listed SlGC-270B One Stage Fire Alarm Station, French/English Markings - ULC Listed SlGA-270P Two Stage (Presignal) Fire Alarm Station, 1(.5) English Markings- UL/ULC Listed SIGC-270P8 Two Stage (Presignal) Fire Alarm Station, French/English Markings - ULC Listed S)GA-278 Double Action (One Stage) Fire Alarm Station, English Markings - UL/ULC Listed ACCESSORIES 32997 GA Key w/Tag - for pre-signal station (CANADA ONLY) 276-1(2 GA Key - for pre-signal station (USA ONLY) 12 Glass Rods - for SIGA-270 series .1 (.05) 27165- (CANADA ONLY) 270-GLR 20 Glass Rods - for SlGA-270 series (USA ONLY) 276-GLR 20 Glass Rods - for SIGA-278 series 276B-RSB Surface Mount Box, Red 1 (.6) - for SIGA pull stations j Number U Catalog Fire •IOI I NOT TO BE USED FOR INSTALLATION PURPOSES Testing & Maintenance To test (or reset) the station simply open the station and operate the exposed switch. The SlGA-270 series are opened with a tool; the SIGA- 278 requires the key which is supplied with that station. The station's automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defective and causes a trouble message. The user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each Signature series device and other pertinent messages. Single devices may be deactivated temporarily, from the control panel. Availability of maintenance features is dependent on the fire alarm system used. Scheduled maintenance (Regular or Selected) for proper system operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/ULC - 536 standards. 0 © 2005 GE Security Page 4 of 4 www.gesecurity.com It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact GE Security. Literature Steet#85QQ1-0279 Printed in U.s.A. Issue 7 Patented ID . EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Part of GE Security INTELLIGENT INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES -,-----.---- - Input Modules Models SIGA-MM1 &SIGA-WTM Fentures Monitorandwaterflow/tamperapptications Includes Alarm with delayed latching (retard) for waterfiow applications, Supervisory, and Monitor. Non-volatile memory Permanently stores serial number, type of device, and job number. Automatically updates historic information including hours of opera- tion, last maintenance date, number of alarms and troubles, and time and date of last alarm. Automatic device mapping Each module transmits wiring information to the loop controller regarding its location with respect to other devices on the circuit Electronicaddressing Permanently stores programmable address; there are no switches or dials to set Addresses are downloaded from a PC, or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool I Intelligent modulec/w integral microprocessor All decisions are made at the module allowing lower communication speed while substantially improving control panel response time. Less sensitive to line noise and circuit wiring properties; twisted or shielded wire is not required. Ground faultdetectionbyaddress Detects ground faults right down to the device level. U Stand-alone operation The module makes decisions and inputs on alarm from initiating devices connected to it even if the loop controllers polling interroga- tion stops. Diagnostic LEDs Status LEDs are visible only when faceplate is removed; flashing GREEN shows normal polling; flashing RED shows alarm/active state. Designed for high ambienttemperature operation - Install in ambient temperatures up to 120F (490C). Designed to ISO 9001 standards Manufactured to strict international quality standards for highest reliability. Description The SIGA-MM1 Monitor Module and SIGA-WTM Woterfiow/Tamper Module are part of EST's Signature Series system. They are intelligent analog addressable devices used to connect one or two Class B normally-open Alarm, Supervisory, or Monitortype dry contact Initiating Device Circuits (lDC). The function of the SIGA-MM1 and SIGA-WTM is determined by the factory loaded personality codes. The input modules gather analog information from the initiating devices connected to them and convert it into digital signals. The module's on- board microprocessor analyzes the signal and decides whether or not to input an alarm. The microprocessor in each module provides four additional benefits - Self-diagnostics and History Log, Automatic Device Mapping, Stand- aloneOperotion and Fast,StableCommunication. Self-diagnostics and History Log - Each.Signature Series module constantly runs self-checks to provide important maintenance informa- tion. The results of the self-check are automatically updated and permanently stored in the module's non-volatile memory. This informa- tion is accessible for review any time at the control panel, PC, or by using the SIGA- PRO Signature Program/Service Tool- The information stored in the module's memory includes: - - module serial number, address, and module type - - date of manufacture, hours of operation, and last maintenance date2 - number of recordedtroublesddatorrn — time and dote of last alarm' - most recent trouble c6dél5 possible trouble codes may be used to-diagnose faults ---- - - 'EST3 V.2 only. 2 Retrievablewith SIGA-PRO programming tool. imagination at work wwwgesecurity.com 8985 TOWN CENTER PARKWAY, BRADENTON, FL 34202 PHONE: 888-378-2329 • FAX: 866-503-3996 CANADA SALES: OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-2430, FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES: 0011 905-270-1711; FAX 10011905-270-9553 Literature Sheet #85001-0297 Issue 5 Not to be used for installation purposes. Pagel of 4 HO TO 2E U'; EC -OR INSTALLATION PURPOSES. 1 41 tomotic Device Mapping - The loop controller learns where each ice's serial number address is installed relative to other devices on ;e circuit The loop controller keeps a map of the Signature Series devices connected to it The Signature Series Data Entry Program also uses the mapping feature. With interactive menus and graphic support. the wired circuits between each device can be examined. Layout or "as-built" drawing information showing wire branches (1-taps), device types and their address are stored on disk for printing hard copy. This takes the mystery out of the installation. The preparation of as-built drawings is fast and efficient. Device mapping allows the Signature loop controllerto discover - unexpected additional device addresses - missing device addresses - changes to the wiring in the circuit Stand-alone Operation - A decentralized alarm decision by the module is guaranteed. On-board intelligence permits the module to operate in stand-alone mode. If loop controllerCPU communications fail for more than four seconds, all devices on that circuit go into stand-alone mode. The circuit acts like a conventional alarm receiving circuit. Each module on the loop continues to collect and analyze information from its slave device and will alarm should their slave device activate. Fast Stable Communication - Built-in intelligence means less informa- tion needs to be sent between the module and the loop controller. Other than regular supervisory polling response, the module only needs to communicate with the loop controller when it has something new to report. This provides very fast control panel response time and allows a lower baud rate (speed) to be used for communication on the ircuit. The lower baud rate offers several advantages including: less sensitivity to circuitwire characteristics less sensitivity to noise glitches on the cable - - less emitted noise from the analog wiring - twisted or shielded wiring is not required. Diagnostic LEDs - Twin LEDs provide visual indication of normal and alarm/active conditions. They are visible only when the front plate is removed. A flashing GREEN LED shows normal system polling from the loop controller. A flashing RED LED means the module is in alarm/active state. Both LEDs on steady shows alarm state - stand-alone mode. Construction - All modules in EST's Signature Series are constructed of high-impact polymer designed to endure the effects of aging. They are finished in white and are identified with front plate markings "FIRE ALARM MODULE". A self-adhesive French label for the front plate is included to be applied by the installer if desired. Quality and Reliability - GE Security modules are manufactured in North America to strict international ISO 9001 standards. All electronics utilize surface mount technology (SMT) for smaller size and greater immunity to RF noise. A conformal coating is used for humidity and corrosion resistance. Installation The SIGA-MM1 and SIGA-WTM modules mount to North American 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) deep one-gang boxes and 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) deep 4 inch square boxes with one-gang covers and SlGA-MP mounting plates. The terminals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm' to 0.75 mm2) wire size. GE Security recommends that this module be installed according to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. Electronic Addressing - The loop controller electronically addresses each module, saving valuable time during system commissioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required. Each module has its own unique serial number stored in its on-board memory. The loop controller identifies each device on the loop and assigns a "soft' address to each serial number. If desired, the modules can be ad- dressed using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. Personality codes are assigned by the factory. No user configuration is required for these modules. e 00 www.gesecurity.com Page 2a1`4 UteratureSheetS85001-0297 issue 5 NOT TO BE USED FOR INSTALLATION PURPOSES, Testing & Maintenance The module's automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defective and causes a trouble message. The user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each module and other pertinent messages. Single modules may be turned off (de-activated) temporarily, from the control panel. Scheduled maintenance (Regular or Selected) for proper system operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Referto current NEPA 72 and ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. Availability of maintenance features is dependent on the fire alarm system used. Typical Wiring The module will accept #18 AWG (0.75mm2), #16(1.0mm2), #14 AWG (1.50mm2), #12 AWG (2.50mm2) wire sizes. Note: Sizes #16 AWG (1.0mm2) and #18 AWG (0.75mm2) are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detoiledwiring requirementspecifications. Initiating (Slave) Device Circuit Wire Specifications Maximum Allowable Wire Resistance 50 ohms (25 ohms per wire) per Circuit Maximum Allowable Wire Capacitance 0.1pF per Circuit For Design Reference: Wire Size Maximum Distance to EOLR #18 AWG (0.75 mm2) 4,000 ft (1219 m) #12 AWG (1.50 mm2) #16 AWG (1.00 mm2) #14 AWG 0.50 mm2) Typical N.O. Watertlow Contact Typical Supervisory Contact Typical N.C. Monitor Contact INPUT INPU12 Ic A &ASW B B) T02 TB2 8 7 UL/UL CLjsted Style B (Cl B) J) 8 7 6 5 - . . S 471<0 EOL UL/ULC Listed A A II lit UL/ULCUsted C:tj 471<0 EOL 2 L?s ' 471<0 EOL II II Red LED Green LED Red LED II Green LED (Alarm/Active) 0 0 4— (Norm (Alann/Acttve) II 32 t (Normal)4 3 2 1 TB1[® m DATA IN (+)>'- (\ I I DATA OUT (+) 5 DATA IN (+)> (\ DATA OUT (+) 1. DATA IN (.) >- .DATA OUT (->1 1. DATA IN(-) >— U . DATA OUT (-) From Stnalure Controller To Next Device From Signature Confroier I To Next Device or Previous Device or Previous Device ModelSlGA-WTM Model SIGA-MM1 Notes Maximum 25 ohms resistance per wire. Maxini[Jm#I2AWG{2 5mm2)wire. Min. #18(0 75mm2) Installation Sheet for Mxirnürn10 Vd@ 35OpA. 5) All wiring power limited and supervised. 6) This module will NOT support 2-wire smoke detectors. www.gesecurity.com Issue 5 Literature Sheet $85001-0297 Page 3 of 4 NOT tO RE J FOR INSTALLAU0N PURPOSES. plication ie duty performed by the SIGA-MM1 and SIGA-WTM is determined by their factory assigned sub-type code or Personality Code". SIGA-WTM NORMALLY-OPEN ALARM - DELAYED LATCHING (Factory set Personality Code 2)- Assigned to one circuit Configures circuit 1 for Class B normally-open Waterfiow Alarm Switches. An ALARM signal is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed for approximately 16 seconds. The alarm condition is latched at the module. SIGA-WTM NORMALLY-OPEN ACTIVE - LATCHING (Factory set Personality Code 4)- Assigned to one circuit Configures circuit? for Class B normally open dry contact Supervisory and Tamper Switches. An ACTIVE signal is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed. The active condition is latched at the module. SIGA-MM1 NORMALLY-OPEN ACTIVE - NON-LATCHING (Factory set Personality Code 3)- Assigned to one circuit Configures circuit lior Class B normally-open dry contact monitoring input such as from Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc. An ACTIVE signal is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed. The active condition is not latched at the module. Compatibility The Signature Series modules are compatible only with EST's Signature - Loop Controller. Warnings & Cautions This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. Ordering Information Table Catalog Ship Wt Number Description lbs (kg) SIGA-MM1 Monitor Module - UL'ULC Listed Waterflow/Tamper Module .4 (.15) SIGA-WTM - UIJULC Listed Accessories 27193-11 Surface Mount Box - Red, 1-gang 27193-16 Surface Mount Box - White, 1-gang 1(.6) MFC A Multifunction Fire Cabinet - Red, supports 7.0 (3.1) Signature Module Mounting Plates SIGA-MP1 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1.5 (0.70) 1 footprint SIGA-MP2 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 0.5 (0.23) 1/2 footprint SIGA-MP2L Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1.02 (0.46) 1/2 extended footprint Specifications Table Catalog Number SIGA-MM1 SIGA-WTM Description Monitor Module Waterflow/Tamper Module Type Code 48 (factory set personality code 3) 49 (factory set personality code 2,4) Address Requirements Uses One Module Address Uses Two Module Addresses Operating Current Standby = 250pA; Activated = 400pA Standby = 396pA; Activated = 6801iA Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc (19 Vdc nominal) Construction ft Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer one-gang front plate - White Storage and Operating Environment Operating Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) Storage Temperature: -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C) Humidity: 0 to 93% RH LED Operation .............---- On-board Green LED - Flashes when polled On-board Red LED - Flashes when in alarm/active Both LEDs - Glow steady when in alarm (stand-alone) Compatibility Agency Listings Use With Signature Loop Controller UL, ULC, CSFM, MEA Mounting North American 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) deep one-gang boxes and 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) deep 4 inch square boxes with one-gang covers and SlGA-MP mounting plates www.gesecurity.com It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications ore subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact GE Security. 02003 GE Security Printed in U.S.A. Page 4 of 4 UteraWre Sheet #85001-0297 issue 5 a SIGA-Cfl12 Patented . EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Part ofGE Security INTELLIGENT INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES Om T2 ESf3' Input Modules Models SIGA-CT1, SlGA-CT2 & SIGA-MCT2 Features i Multiple applications Including Alorm,Alarm with delayed latching (retard)forwaterflow applications. Supervisory, and Monitor. The installer selects one of four .personality codes to be downloaded to the module through the loop controller. Plug-in (UIO)orstandard 1-gang mount UlO versions allow quick installation where multiple modules are required. The 1-gang mount version is ideal for remote locations that require a single module. Automatic device mapping Signature modules transmit information to the loop controller regarding their circuit locations with respect to other Signature devices on the wire loop. 2 Electronic addressing Programmable addresses are downloaded from the loop controller, a PC, or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. There are no switches or dials to set a Intelligentdevice with microprocessor All decisions are mode at the module to allow lower communication speed with substantially improved control panel response time and less sensitivity to line noise and loop wiring properties; twisted or shielded wire is not required. Non-volatile memory Permanently stores serial number, type of device, and job number. Automatically updates historic information including hours of opera- tion, lost maintenance date, number of alarms and troubles, and time and date of last alarm. Stand-aloneoperation The module makes decisions and inputs an alarm from initiating devices connected to it even if the loop controller's polling interroga- tion stops. (Function availability dependent upon control panel.) I Ground fault detection by address Detects ground faults right down to the device léveL Diagnostic LEDs Flashing GREEN shows normal polling; flashing RED shows alarm! activestate. I High ambienttemperatureoperation Install in ambient temperatures up to 120°F (490C). Designed to ISO 9001 standards All Signature products are manufactured to strict international quality standards to ensure highest reliability. SIGA-MCT2 t (qo 0 MEA KE Appl,cotion Notes Avedoble Description The SIGA-CT1 Single Input Module and SIGA-CT2/SIGA-MCT2 Dual Input Modules are intelligent analog addressable devices used to connect one or two Class B normally-open Alarm. Supervisory, or Monitor type dry contact Initiating Device Circuits (IDC). The actual function of these modules is determined by the personality code selected by the installer. This code is downloaded to the module from the Signature loop controller during system configuration. The input modules gather analog information from the initiating devices connected to them and convert it into digital signals. The module's on- board microprocessor analyzes the signal and decides whether or not to input an alarm. The SIGA-CT1 and SIGA-C1'2 mount to standard North American 1- gang electrical boxes, making them ideal for locations where only one module is required. Separate I/O and data loop connections are mode to each module. - The SIGA-MCT2 is port of the UIO family of plug-in Signature Series modules. It functions identically to the SIGA-C72. but takes advantage of the modularflexibility and easy installation that characterizes all UIO modules. Two- and six-module UIO motherboards are available. All wiring connections are made to terminal blocks on the motherboard. UIO assemblies may be mounted in GE Security enclosures www.gesecurity.com 8985 TOWN CENTER PARKWAY, BRADENTON, FL 34202 PHONE: 888-378-2329 • FAX: 866-503-3996 CANADA SALE& OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-243&. FAX 519-376-7258 () imagination at work INTERNATIONAL SALES. 001) 905-270-1711; FAX (001)905-270-9553 Literature Sheet 885001-0241 Issue 6 Not to be used for installation purposes. Page 1 of 4 .N 01 TO BE USED FOR USTALLATION PURPOSES. Otallation IGA-CT1 and SIGA-CT2: modules mount to North American 21h inch(64 - mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 11h inch (38 mm) deep 4 inch square boxes with 1-gang covers and SlGA-MP mounting plates. The terminals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm' to 0.75 mm2) wire size. SIGA-MCT2: mount the UIO motherboard inside a suitable GE Security enclosure with screws and washers provided. Plug the SIGA-MCT2 into any available position on the motherboard and secure the module to the motherboard with the captive screws. Wiring connections are made .the terminals on the motherboard (see wiring diagram). UIO otherboard terminals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm' to 0.75 nm9 wire size. UIO Motherboard 6-32 Self-tapping screws Plug-in (UIO) >Capfive Module - screws ra —Cabinet or electrical enclosure Electronic Addressing -The loop controller electronically addresses each module, saving valuable time during system commissioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required. Each module has its own unique serial number stored in its on-board .memory. .The loop controller identifies each device on the loop and assigns a"soft' address to each serial number. If desired, the modules can be ad- dressed using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. GE Security recommends that this module be installed according to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. Compatibility ' Ihe Signature Series modules are compatible only with EST's Signature ..00p Controller. Application The duty performed by the SIGA-CT1 and SIGA-CT2/MCT2 is determined by their sub-type code or Personality Code. The code is selected by the installer depending upon the desired application and is downloaded from the loop controller. One personality code can be assigned to the SIGA-CT1. Two personality codes can be assigned to the SIGA-CT2/MCT2. Codes 1, 2, 3 and 4 can be mixed on SIGA-CT2/MCT2 modules only. For example, personality code 1 can be assigned to the first address (circuit Aland code 4 can be assigned to the second address (circuit BY NORMALLY-OPEN ALARM - LATCHING (Personality Code 1)- Assign to one or both circuits. Configures either circuit A or B or both for Class B normally open dry contact initiating devices such as Pull Stations, Heat Detectors. etc. An ALARM signal is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed. The alarm condition is latched at the module. NORMALLY-OPEN ALARM - DELAYED LATCHING (Personality Code 2)- Assign to one or both circuits. Configures either circuit A or B or both for Class B normally-open dry contact initiating devices such as Waterflow Alarm Switches. An ALARM signal is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed for approximately 16 seconds. The alarm condition is latched at the module. NORMALLY-OPEN ACTIVE - NON-LATCHING (Personality Code 3) - Assign to one or both circuits. Configures either circuit A or B or both for Class B normally-open dry contact monitoring input such as from Fans, Dampers, Doors. etc. An ACTIVE signal is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed. The active condition is not latched at the module. NORMALLY-OPEN ACTIVE - LATCHING (Personality Code 4) - Assign to one or both circuits. Configures either circuit A or B or both for Class B normally open dry contact monitoring input such as from Supervisory and Tamper Switches. An ACTIVE signal is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed. The active condition is latched at the module. Ordering Information Catalog Ship Wt. Number Description lbs (kg) tt5ACT1 Single Input Module - UL/ULC Listed 0.4(0.15) SIGA-CT2, Dual Input Module - ULIULC Listed 0.4(0.15) SIGA-MCT2 Dual Input Plug-in (UIO) Module 0.1 1005 —ULULCListed Related Equipment -------. -- 27193-11 Surface Mount Box - Red, 1-gang 1.0(0.6) 27193-16 Surface Mount Box - White, 1-gang 1.0(0.6) SlGA UIO2R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser -032 0 -1511- - Inputs -Two Module Positions -: -• SIGA-UIO6R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser 28) Inputs — Six Module Positions GA UIOS S - Universal Input-Output Module Board -------- -- .5-01015) —SixModulePositions - -. MFC A Multifunction Fire Cabinet Red supports 7 0(31) Signature Module Mounting[ PIàt SGA-MP1 Signature Module Mounting Plate; 1 footprint -. 1.5 (0.70) SIGA-MP2 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 footprint 0.5 (0.23) SIGA-MP2L Signature Module Mounting Plate. 1/2 extended 1.02(0.46) footprint www.gesecurity.com Page 2 of 4 LIterature Sheet *55001-0241 Issue 6 9T TO BE USED FOR 1 NSTALLAHOTJ PURPOSES Typical Wiring Modules will accept #18 AWG (0.75mm2). #16 lL0mm2l, and #14AWG (1.50mm2), and #12 AWG (2.50mm2) wire sizes. Note: Sizes #16 AWG (1.0mm2) and #18 AWG (0.75mm2) are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailedwirirtg requirement specifications. Initiating (Slave) Device Circuit Wire Specifications Maximum Allowable Wire Resistance 50 ohms (25 ohms per wire) per Circuit Maximum Allowable Wire Capacitance 0.1pF per Circuit For Design Reference: Wire Size Maximum Distance-to EOLR #18 AWG (0.75 mm2) 4,000ft(1,219m) #12 AWG (1.50 mm?) #16 AWG (1.00mm2) #14 AWG (1.50 mm2) Typical N.O. hilttattng DevIce Typical N.O. tnfttalhig Device I I INPUT 1 INPUT 2 I! A L/ Style B (Class B) 111 87 . S S Red LED 0 M~ ULJULC Listed Style B (Class B) 47Kg EOL UL/ULC Listed A A A 1 4710) SOL Green LED Red LED (Normal) (Aiarm/Acflve) 1811 (Do S S II ULjULCUsted 47KD EOI. 0 Green LED (Normal) DATA IN (+) >- DATA IN(-) >- From 5gnature Controller or Previous Device SIGA-CT1 DATA OUT (+)1 f DATA IN(+)>— ,DATAOIJT(-) J 1, DATA IN(-)>_-_— From Signature Controller To Next Device or Previous Device SIGA-CT2 DATA OUT (+) DATA OtJt(-) To Next Device i NOTES UL Maximum 25 Ohm resistance per wire. 47KflEor. Maximum #12 AWG 2.5 mm') wire: Minimum #18 AWG (0.75 mm2). Refer to Signature controller installation sheet for wiring specifications. Maximum 10 Vdc@350 VA TheSlGA-UtO6R and the SlGA-UtO2Rdo not come with lfll4. - 6 All wiring is supervised and power-limited. - -- 7 These modules will not support 2 wiresmokedetectors -------- 1 - - - - - -. GLED (1 - Warnings &Cautions - --_: This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards - with your local fire protection specialist. Lbw 41152 Ea. SIGA-MCT2 www.gesecuritg.com Issue 6 Literabjre5heet*8S001-0241 Page 3 of 4 Nor To P, E uSED O I NSTALLAHON PURPOSES. ecifications "atalog Number SIGA-CT1 S1GA.C172 SIGA-MCTZ Description Single Input Module Dual Input Module Type Code 48 (factory set) 49 (factory set) Four sub-types (personality codes) are available Four sub-types (personality codes) are available Address Requirements Uses One Module Address Uses Two Module Addresses Operating Current Standby = 250pA; Activated = 4001iA Standby = 396iA; Activated = 68iA Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc (19 Vdc nominal) Construction High Impact Engineering Polymer North American 21/2 inch (64 mm) deep one-gang boxes and 11/2 inch I UIO2R/6R16 Mounting (38 mm) deep 4 inch square boxes with one-gang covers and Motherboard SlGA-MP mounting plates I Storage and Operating Environment Operating Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) Storage Temperature: -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C); Humidity: 0 to 93% RH LED Operation On-board Green LED - Flashes when polled; On-board Red LED - Flashes when in alarm/active Both LEDs - Glow steady when in alarm (stand-alone) Compatibility --- -- - Use with Signature Loop Controller Agency Listings UL, ULC, MEA, CSFM Description (Signature Overview) The Signature Series intelligent onaiog-addressable system from GE Security is an entire family of multi-sensor detectors and mounting bases, multiple-function input and output modules, network and non- network control panels, and user-friendly maintenance and service tools. Analog information from equipment connected to Signature devices is gathered and converted into digital signals. An onboard microprocessor in each Signature device measures and analyzes the signal and decides whether or not to input on alarm. The microproces- in each Signature device provides four additional benefits - Self- gnostics and History Log, Automatic Device Mapping, Stand-alone peration and Fast, Stable Communication. self-diagnostics and History log - Each Signature Series device constantly runs self-checks to provide important maintenance informa- tion. The results of the self-check are automatically updated and permanently stored in its non-volatile memory. This information is accessible for review any time at the control panel, PC, or using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. The information stored in device memory includes: Device serial number, address, and type Date of manufacture, hours of operation, and last maintenance dote2 Number of recorded alarms and troubles' Time and date of lost alarm' Most recent trouble code logged by the detector - 32 possible trouble codes may be used to diagnose faults. Automatic Device Mapping -The Signature Data Controller (SDC) learns where each device's serial number address is installed relative to other devices on the circuit The SDC keeps a map of all Signature Series devices connected to it. The Signature Series Data Entry Program also uses the mapping feature With iiferEtii ñThiis and graphic support.- the wired circuits between each device can be examined. Layout or 'as- built" drawing information showing- branch wiring (T-tops), device types and their address are stored on disk for printing hard copy. This takes the mystery- out of the-installation-The preparation of as-built drawings is fast and efficient - Device mapping allowstheSig nature- DataController to discover Unexpected additional device-addresses. Missing device_dddréè _- Changes tothe wiring-in the-circuit.. - Most Signature rdulei - installer to determinê their octuo1 function. Personality codes are downloaded from the SDC during system configuration and are dicated during device mapping. .andalone Operation - A decentralized alarm decision by the device is guaranteed. Onboard intelligence permits the device to operate in standalone (degrade) mode. If Signature loop controller CPU communi- cations fail for more than four seconds, all devices on that circuit go into standalone mode. The circuit acts like a conventional alarm receiving circuit. Each Signature device on the circuit continues to collect and analyze information from its slave devices. When connected to a panel utilizing standalone operation, modules with their "personality set as alarm devices lIDCl will alarm should their slave alarm-initiating device activate. Fast Stable Communication - Built-in intelligence means less information needs to be sent between the device and the Signature Data Controller (SDC). Other than regular supervisory polling response, Signature devices only need to communicate with the SDC when they have something new to report. This provides very fast control panel response and allows a lower baud rate (speed) to be used for communication on the circuit. The lower baud rate offers several advantages including: Less sensitivity to circuit wire characteristics. Less sensitivity to noise glitches on the cable. Less emitted noise from the data wiring. Twisted or shielded wiring is not required. Diagnostic LEDs - Twin LEDs on most Signature devices provide visual indication of normal and alarm-active conditions. A flashing green LED shows normal system polling. A flashing red LED means the module is in alarm-active state. Both LEDs on steady indicates alarm-active state - standalone mode. Testing & Maintenance - Automatic self-diagnosis identifies when a Signature device is defective and causes a trouble message. The user- friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each device and other pertinent information. Single devices may be turned off temporarily, from the control panel. Scheduled maintenance (Regular or Selected) for proper system operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and UIC CAN/ULC 536 standards. Quality and Reliability - GE Security Signature devices are manufactured in North America to strict international ISO 9001 standards. All electronics utilize surface mount technology (SMT) for smaller size and greater immunity to RF noise. A conformal coating is used for humidity and conosan resistance. 'EST3 V.2 only. Retrievable with SIGA-PRO programming tool. wwwgesecurity.com It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are Subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact GE Security. 0 2003 GE Security Printed in U.S.A. Page 4of4 Uten3ture Sheet 885001-0241 issue 6 .10 EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Port of GE Security INTELLIGENT INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES corrip'oi QS Synchronization Output Module SIGA-CC'IS, MCC1S Provides UL 1971-compliant auto-sync output for visual signals Use for connecting a supervised output circuit to a supervised 24 Vdc riser inputand synchronizing multiple notification appliance circuits. Functions as an audible signal riser selector Use as a synch module or for connecting supervised 24 Vdc Audible! Visible signal circuits, or 25 and 70 VRMS Audio Evacuation and Telephone circuits to their power inputs. Built-in ring-tone generator When configured for telephone circuits, the SIGA-CC1S generates its own ring-tone signal, eliminating the need for a separate ring-tone circuit a Automatic device mapping Signature modules transmit information to the loop controller regarding their circuit locations with respect to other Signature devices on the wire loop. Electronicaddressing Programmable addresses are downloaded from the loop controller, a PC, or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool; there arena switches or dials to set. Intelligent device with microprocessor All decisions are made at the module to allow lower communication speed with substantially improved control panel response time and less sensitivity to line noise and loop wiring properties; twisted or shielded wire is not required. Non-volatile memory Permanently stores serial number, type of device, and job number. Automatically updates historic information including hours of opera- tion, lost maintenance date, number of alarms and troubles, and time and date of-last alarm. Ground fault detection by address Detects ground faults right down to the device level. DiognosticLEDs Flashing GREEN shows normal polling; flashing RED shows alarm/ active state. High ambienttemperature operation Install in ambient temperatures up to 120°F (490C). - - I Designed tó ISO 9001standards All Signature products are manufactured to strict international quality standards to ensure highest reliability. 0 imagination at work Patented - It 9 *MEA Description SIGA-CC1S and MCC1S Synchronization Output Modules are intelligent analog addressable devices that form part of EST's Signature line of products. The actual operation of the SIGA-CC1S and MCC1S is deter- mined by the "personality code selected by the installer, which is downloaded to the module from the Signature loop controller during system configuration. Depending on their assigned personalit,Synchronization Output Modules may be used as a signal power riser selector to provide synchronization of fire alarm signals across multiple zones, or for connecting, upon command from the loop controller, supervised Class B signal or telephone circuits to their respective power inputs. The power inputs may be polarized 24 Vdc to operate audible and visible signal appliances or 25 and 70 VRMS to operate audio evacuation speakers and firefighter's telephones. Application The SIGA-CC1S mounts to a standard North American two-gong electrical box, making it ideal for locations where only one module is required. Separate I/O and data loop connections are made to each module. - --- -- - The SIGA-MCC1S is port of the UIO family of plug-in Signature Series modules. It functions identically to the SIGA-CC1S, but takes advantage of the modular flexibility and easy installation that characterize all UIO modules. Two- and six-module UIO motherboards are available. These can accommodate individual risers for each on-board module, or risers thatare shared by any combination of its UIO modules. All wiring connections are made to terminal blocks on the motherboard. UlO assemblies may be mounted in GE Security enclosures. www.gesecuritij.com 8985 TOWN CENTER PARKWAY, BRADENTON, FL 34202 PHONE: 888-378-2329 • FAX: 866-503-3996 CANADA SALES.' OWEN SOUND. ON 519-376-2430. FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES: (0011905-270-1711; FAX (001) 905-270-9553 Uteroture Sheet #85001.-05&3 Issue 3 Not to be used for Installation purposes. Page 1 of 4 'I) O 3 JSE )' STLAION PURPOSES eIrsonality Codes e operation of the SIGA-CC1S is determined by their sub-type code or Personality Code'. The code is selected by the installer depending upon the desired application and is downloaded from the loop control- ler. Personality Code 5: Signal Power or Audio Evacuation (single riser). Configures the module for use as a Class B Audible/Visible Signal power (24 Vdc polarized) or Audio Evacuation (25 0170 VRMS) power selector. The ring-tone generator is disabled. The output circuit is monitored for open or shorted wiring. If a short exists, the control panel inhibits the activation of the audible/visible signal circuitto prevent connection to the power circuit. Personality Code 6: Telephone with ring-tone (single riser). Configures the module for use as a Telephone power selector. When a telephone handset is plugged into its jack or lifted from its hook, the module generates its own Ring-Tone signal. A separate ring-tone circuit is not needed. The module sends this signal to the control panel to indicate that on off-hook condition is present. When the system operator responds to the call, the ring-tone signal is disabled. Personality Code 25: Visual Signal Synchronization. This personality code configures the module to provide synchronization of fire alarm signals across multiple zones. It functions as a signal power (24 Vdc) riser selector. The output wiring is monitored for open circuits and short circuits. A short circuit will cause the fire alarm control panel to inhibit the activation of the audible/visual signal circuit so the riser is not connected to the wiring fault 0ectron ic Addressing .ie loop controller electronically addresses each module saving valuable time during system commissioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required. Each module has its own unique serial number stored in its on-board memory. The loop controller identifies each device on the loop and assigns a "soft" address to each serial number. If desired, the modules can be addressed using the SlGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. Warnings & Cautions This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires fre- quently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your fire protection specialist. Compatibility The Synchronization Output Module is compatible with EST's Signature Loop Controller operating under EST3 version 2.0 or higher, and QuickStart Signature Loop Intelligent Controller. Testing & Maintenance The module's automatic self-diagnosis identifies when itis defective and causes a trouble message. The user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each module and other pertinent messages. Single modules may be turned off (de-activated) temporarily, from the control panel. Scheduled maintenance (Regular or Selected) for proper system *peration should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority aving Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and IJLC CAN/ULC '16 standards. Installation The SIGA-CC1S: mounts to North American 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) deep 2-gang boxes and 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) deep 4 inch square boxes with 2-gong covers and SIGA-MP mounting plates. The terminals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm'] wire size. SIGA-MCC1S: mount the UlOxR motherboard inside a suitable GE Security enclosure with screws and washers provided. Plug the module into any available position on the motherboard and secure the module to the motherboard with the captive screws. Wiring connections are made to the terminals on the motherboard (see wiring diagram). UlOxR motherboard terminals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm') wire size. Specifications Catalog Number SIGA-CCIS. SIGA-MCC1S Description Synchronization Output Module Type Code 50 (factory set) Address Requirements Uses one module address Wiring Terminations Suitable for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm2 to 0.75mm2) North American 21h inch (64 mm) deep two-gang boxes and 1½ inch (38 mm) Plugs into Mounting deep 4 inch U102R, UI06R or U106 square boxes with Motherboards 2-gang covers and SIGA-MP mounting plates Operating Current , Standb,2iA Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc (19 Vdc nominal) 24 Vdc =2amps Output Rating 25 V Audio = 50 watts 70 V Audio = 35 watts Construction High Impact Engineering Polymer Storage and Operating Operating: 32°F to 120°F ((°C to 49°C) Environment Storage: -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C) Humidity: 0 to 93% RH LED Operation Green LED - Flashes when polled Red LED - Rashes when in alarm/active Compatibility Use with: Signature Loop Controller under EST3 version 2.0 or higher Agency Listings UL ULC, CSFMI, MEA Plug-in (L110) Module eel xe GE Security recommends that these modules be installed according to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. www.gesecurity.com Page 2 of 4 Literature Sheet#85001-0543 issue 3 3E Oir llAL1.A3Ni PURPOSE5 Typical Wiring - SIGA-CC1S (Standard Mount) Personality Typical Spealw Circuit Code 5 ULAJLC Wed 47K0 ECt. Personality Typical Telephone Circuit Code 6 ULIUIC Listed 47K0 EOL NXV U Personality Enhanced Integrity and Genests Devices Code 25 F`"`-i UuJUt.0 Listed 4710) Ed SIGA-CCIS 0 .0 Riserout(+) To next duece Riser out (-) Riser in (+) Data out (+) Riser in ___________ To nest dense or EOL Data out (-) (-) I Data in(+}) From Signature Ccyrtroller . Data in () or Previous Denise SIGA-MCC1S (UIO Mount) Personality Code 5 4710) COt. Personality, Typical Telephone Circuit Code 6 UUULC Ld [IIII]JItiIII1X[ Ed Personality Enhanced Integrity and Genesis Devices Code 25 UUULC Listed 47K0E0t. 1234 areS., mothrebeerd ________ Data :..'tiser lOut ____ 1IP7(i Roerl 5 Data _ Circuit TI Data Out J 14 Green LED (Nomral) ::: ! Red LED (Active) 1234 Riser I inj L!; Riser I out in Data f Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs) Enhanced integrity or Genesis denise, Next Booster Power Supply Supply NACI - /NAC4_ Booster Power 1,11. Supply Main Board ; sense IN I CON / - NO 109 OUTI TmubleCOM Bon, NC P2 A - - Ott oft - - + - Tanseter3iGC1S +cowftudam W EDL - L—bpe—e—n Synchronization across NACs on multiple Booster Powersupplies Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs) Enhanced Integrity or Genesis devices First Booster Power Supply /"1 -- NAC3 Booster Power 7 / NAC4 fAUX tN- Fio Sense I COMER ourCJ-3 SuPP - Sense 2 COMER OUT II I 155 NO II Trouble COME I !7 NC] www.gesecurito.com Issue 3 Literoture Sheet #85001-0543 Page 3 of 4 NOT TO RE U 1 ED OR INSTALLATION PURPOSES Odering information ..atalog Number IDescription Shipping Wt.: lbs (kg) Synchronization Output Module (Standard Mount) - ULJULC Listed 0.5(0.23) SIGA-MCC1S Synchronization Output Module (UIO Mount) - UIJULC Listed 0.18 (0.08) Related Equipment 27193-21 Surface Mount Box - Red, 2-9ang 2(1.2) 27193-26 Surface Box - White, 2-gang _Mount SlGA-U102R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs - Two Module Positions 0.32 (0.15) SIGA-UI06R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs - Six Module Positions 0.62 (0.28) SlGA-U106 Universal Input-Output Module Board - Six Module Positions 0.56 (0.25) 235196P Eli-polar Transient Protector 0.01 (0.05) MFC-A Multifunction Fire Cabinet - Red, supports Signature Module Mounting Plates 7.0 (3.1) SIGA-MP1 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1 footprint 1.5(0.70) SlGA-MP2 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 footprint 0.5 (0.23) SIGA-MP2L Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 extended footprint 1.02 (0.46) Description (Signature Overview) The Signature Series intelligent analog-addressable system from GE Security is an entire family of multi-sensor detectors and mounting bases, multiple-function inputand olitput modules, network and non- network control panels, and user-friendly maintenance and service tools. Analog information from equipment connected to Signature devices is gathered and converted into digital signals. An onboard microprocessor in each Signature device measures and analyzes the signal and decides whether or not to input an alarm. The microproces- sor in each Signature device provides four additional benefits - Self- .gnostics and History Log, Automatic Device Mapping, Stand-alone eration and Fast, Stable Communication. elf-diagnostics and History Log - Each Signature Series device constantly runs self-checksto provide important maintenance informa- tion. The results of the self-check are automatically updated and permanently stored in its non-volatile memory. This information is accessible for review any time at the control panel. PC, or using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. The information stored in device memory includes; Device serial number, address, and type Date of manufacture, hours of operation, and last maintenancedate2 Number of recorded alarms and troubles2 Most Signature modules use a personality code selected by the installer to determine their actual function. Personality codes are downloaded from the SOC during system configuration and are indicated during device mapping. Fast Stable Communication - Built-in intelligence means less informa- tion needs to be sent between the device and the Signature Data Controller (Sod. Other than regular supervisory polling response, Signature devices only need to communicate with the SOC when they have something new to report This provides very fast control panel response and allows a lower baud rate (speed) to be used for commu- nication on the circuit The lower baud rate offers several advantages including: Less sensitivity to circuit wire characteristics Less sensitivity to noise glitches on the cable Less emitted noise from the data wiring Twisted or shielded wiring is not required. Diagnostic LEDs -Twin LEDs on most Signature devices provide visual indication of normal and alarm-active conditions. A flashing green LED shows normal system polling. A flashing red LED means the module is in alarm-active state. Both LEDs on steady indicates alarm-active state - standalonemode. Time and date of lost alarm' Testing & Maintenance -Automatic self-diagnosis identifies when a Most recent trouble code logged by the detector -32 possible Signature device is defective and causes a trouble message. The user- trouble codes may be used to diagnose faults. friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each device Automatic Device Mapping -The Signature Data Controller(SDC) learns and other pertinent information. Single devices may be turned off where each device's serial number address is installed relative to other- temporang,from the control panel. Scheduled main-tenance (Regular devices on the circuit The SOC keeps a map of all Signature Series or Selected) for proper system operation should be planned to meet devices connected to it The Signature Series Data Entry Program also the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to uses the mapping feature. With interactive menus and graphic support, current NFPA72 and ULC CAN/U IC 536 standards. - the wired circuits between each device can be examined. Layout or as- Qffalityand Reliability - GE SecuritU Signature devices are manufac- built" drawing information showing branch wiring (T-taps). device types iiiditiNói-th America to strict international ISO 9001 standards. All and their address are stored on disk for printing hard copy. This takes elefronics utilize surface móunttechnology (SMT) for smaller size and the mystery out of the installation. The preparation to RFnoise. Aconfornial coating is used for humidity fast and efficient -- - ar'idcorrosiorwesistance------ Device mapping allows the Signature Data Controller todiscover Unexpected additional device addresses Missing device addresses Changes to the wiring in the circuit IEST3 V.2 only. 2Reblewith SIGpRO prOgrammingtool. www.gesecuritg.com it is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this specificotian sheet. contact GE Security. © 2003 (SE Security Printed in USA Page4of4 Uterature Sheet #85001-0543 Issue 3 SIGA-CRx MEA Patented S Ea. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Part of GE Security INTELLIGENT INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES 0 Control Relay Modules ModeLSIGSlGA-MCR SIGA-CRR, SIGA-MCRR Provides one no/nc contact (SIGA-CR/MCR) Form dry relay contact can be used to control external appliances such as door closers, fans, dampers etc. U Allows group operation of sounder bases The SIGA-CRPJMCRR reverses the polarity of its 24 Vdc output, thus activating all Sounder Bqses on the data loop. Plug-in (UIO)orstandard 1-gang mount UIO versions allow quick installation where multiple modules are required. The 1-gang mount version is ideal for remote locations that require a single module. U Automciticdevicemapping Signature modules transmit information to the loop controller regarding their circuit locations with respect to other Signature devices on the wire loop. U Electronic Addressing Programmable addresses are downloaded from the loop controller, a PC, or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. There are no switches or dials to set U lntelligentdevice with microprocessor All decisions are made at the module to allow lower communication speedwith substantially improved control panel response time and less sensitivity to line noise and loop wiring properties; twisted or shielded wire is not required. U Ground fault detection by address Detects ground faults right down to the device level. U Non-volatile memory Permanently stores serial number, type of device, and job number. Automatically updates historic information including hours of opera- tion: last maintenance date, number of alarms and troubles, and time and date oflastalarm. - U DiagnosticLEDsTT Ftdshing GREEN shows normal polling; flashing RED shows alarm/ activestate. - - - U- Higèntpèratureoperation lnstallin ambienttemperatures upto 1200F(49°C). Dsignedto9001standards — AllSignotureproductsare manufacturedto strict international quality standards to ensure highest reliability. SiGAMcax Description The Control Relay Module and the Polarity Reversal Relay Module are part of EST's Signature Series system. They are intelligent analog addressable devices available in either plug-in (UIO) versions, or standard 1-gang mount versions. The SIGA-CR/MCR Control Relay Module provides a Form dry relay contact to control external appliances such as door closers, fans, dampers etc. This device does not provide supervision of the state of the relay contact. Instead, the on-board microprocessor ensures that the relay is in the proper ON/OFF state. Upon command from the loop controller, the SIGA-CR/MCR relay activates the normally open or normally-closedcontoct. The SIGA-CRR/MCRR Polarity Reversal Relay Module provides a Form dry relay contact to power and activate a series of SIGA-AB4G Audible Sounder Bases. Upon command from the Signature loop controller, the SIGA-CRR reverses the polarity of its 24 Vdc output thus activating all Sounder Bases on the data loop. Standard-mount versions (SIGA-CR and SIGA-CRR) are installed to standard North American 1-gang electrical boxes, making them ideal for locations where only one module is required. Separate I/O and data loop connections are made to each module. - - - Plug-in UIO versions (SIGA-MCR and SIGA-MCRR) are part of the UIO family of plug-in Signature Series modules. They function identically to the standard mount versions, but take advantage of the modular flexibility and easy installation that characterizes all UlO modules. Two- and six-module UIO motherboards are available. All wiring connections are made to terminal blocks on the motherboard. UIO assemblies may be mounted in GE Security enclosures. Or- 0 imagination at work www.gesecurity.com 8985 TOWN CENTER PARKWAY, BRADENTON, FL 34202 PHONE: 888-378-2329 • FAX: 866-503-3996 CANADA SALES OWEN SOUND. ON 519-376-243 FAX 519-376-7258 iNTERNATIONAL SAI.ES: (001190S-270-1711; FAX (001)905-270-9553 Literature Sheet #85001-0239 Issue 7 Not to be used for installation purposes. Page Sot 6 ;'IS AnON 'JRPOSES Astallation .,IGA-CR and SIGA-CRR: modules mount to North American 21/2 inch (64 mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 11/2 inch (38 mm) deep 4 inch square boxes with 1-gang covers and SIGA-MP mounting plates. The terminals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2) wire size. IGA-MCR and SIGA-MCRR: mount the UlO motherboard inside a table GE Security enclosure with screws and washers pro- 'ided. Plug the module into any available position on the ,notherboord and secure the module to the motherboard with the captive screws. Wiring connections are made to the terminals on the motherboard (see wiring diagram). UIO motherboard termi- nals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm' to 0.75 mm') wire size. utoMlhemoard 6-32 Module SCAYM #6 Flat YAL-Mrs —Cabinet or electrical enclosure Electronic Addressing -The loop controller electronically addresses each module, saving valuable time during system commissioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required. Each module has _Its own unique serial number stored in its on-board memory. The loop - controller identifies-each device on-the loop and assigns a'soft' - address-to each-serial number. If desired, the modules can be ad- dressed using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. .E Security recommends that this module be installed according to test recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. Application The operation of Signature Series control relays is determined by their sub-type code or Personality Code. Personality Code 8: CONTROL RELAY (SIGA-CR/MCR) - Dry Contact Output This setting configures the module to provide one Form "C" DRY RELAY CONTACT to control Door Closers, Fans, Dampers. etc. Contact rating is 2.0 amp @ 24 Vdc; 0.5 amp @ 120 Vac (or 220 Vac for non-UL applications). Personality Code 8 is assigned at the factory. No user configuration is required. Personality Code 8: POLARITY REVERSAL RELAY MODULE (SIGA-CRR/ MCRR). This setting configures the module to reverse the polarity of its 24 Vdc output Contact rating is 2.0 amp @24 Vdc (pilot duty). Personal- ity Code 8 is assigned at the factory. No user configuration is required. Compatibility TheSignoture Series modules are compatible only with EST's Signature Loop Controller. Warnings & Cautions This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist Testing & Maintenance The module's automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defective and causes a trouble message. The user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each module and other pertinent messages. Single modules may be turned off (deactivated) temporarily, from the control panel. Availability of maintenance features is dependenton the fire alarm system used. Scheduled maintenance (Regular or Selected) for proper system operation should be planned to meet the require- ments of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Referto current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. www.gesecurity.com Page 2 of 6 Literature Sheet #85001-0239 Issue 7 NOT TO SE USED FOR INSTALLATION PURPOSES. Typical Wiring Modules will accept #18 AWG (0.75mm1, #16(1.0mm2), #14 AWG (1.50mm2) and #12 AWG (2.5mm2) wire sizes. Note: Sizes #16 AWG (1.0mm2) and #18 AWG (0.75mm2) are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. Normally- Normally- Open Common Closed S f DATA IN (+) DATA IN(-) From Signature or Previous SIGA-CR Control Relay Normally Open Common Normally Closed jA2 1234 Data ln +T 4 2 Data Out_ Notes Refer to Signature Loop Controller Installation Sheet for wiring specifications. NFPA 72 requires that the SlGA-CR/SIGA-MCIR be installed in the same room as the device it is controlling. This requirement may not apply in all markets. Check with your local AHJ for details. The SlGA-U106R and the SIGA-U102R do not come with TB14. The SIGA-U106 does not come with TB8 through TB13. Supervised and power-limited. If the source is nonpower-limited, maintain a space of 1/4 inch from power-limited wiring or use FPL FPLP, FPLR, or an equivalent in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 7) Maximum #12 AWG (2.5mm2) wire. Mm. #18 (0.75mm2). - - No connections required for SIGA-MCR. Other modules may require connections. Green LED (Normal) A OUT (+) A OUT (-) Jext Device Green LED (Normal) Red LED (Active) FAI No connections required for SlGA-MCR. Other modules may require connections. f SIGA-MCR Control Relay www.gesecuritg.com Issue 7 Literature Sheet #85001-0239 Pag.30f6 'Geen LED (Nonnat) 1 iecrer - 14000nnecfionsrequkedfbf~ SiGA-MCRR. Othe( modules may require connections A V A No connections required for SiGA-MCRR Other modules may require connections. -rs 6.JI 'SiGACRR - [No actions required for S)GA-MCRR. Other modules may requectnctions. NO ro BE JSFO FOR NSTLLATION PURPOSES picaI Wiring du1es will accept #18 AWG (0.75mm9, #16 (1.0mm 2), #14 AWG (1.50mm2) and #12 AWG (2.50mm2) wire sizes. Note: Sizes #16 AWG (1.0mm2) and #18 AWG (0.75mm2) are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. SIGA-AB4G SIGA-AB4G SIGA-AB4G Audible Base Audible Base Audible Base 6254A-003 EOL Relay Listed 24 VDC + Nominal Power Supply — A1 LT FL SIGA-CR lGA-C6 co :° Optional SIGA- CR for disabling/disconnecting sounder base Signature Controller I — . S SIGA-Ci SIGA-CRR 0 0 SIGA-MCRR SlGA-CRR Schematic oan in Fovier Out Foority ase6 I M~ ACINVW SIGA-MCRR Schematic / I- I- 0 Audible Bases + • Uc0000 Uco U EOL Relay reqi*edfor 7 Signature ;F Notes Lata out ____________ Refer to the Signature controller installation sheet for Quit A E One Pair of Wires 124 Vdc power). 1.11.0-C Listed 24Vdcpoiser - One Pair of Wires (Signature Dotal I or L SingleWire)24Vdcpower). 1234 1234 II 1 1 LA - For sonnet operation For General Pro Atena Operation • • SIGA.CTI The SlGA-Ul06R and the SIGA-U102R do not come with 1814. AA /..\ TheSPGA-UlO6doesnotcomewithT88throughTB13. ------ O5I5O%ibJ i Supervised and power-limited. signatue If the source is nonpower-limited, maintain a space of Data 1/4 inch from power-limited wiring or use FPL FPLP, cacuit I FPLR. or an equivalent in accordance with the National +) Electrical Code. Data fl - 9 Maximum #12 AWG 12.5 mm2 ) wire; Minimum #18 AWG (0.75 mm' I. 10 End-of-Line Relay must monitor and report power Green L (Nonaat) supply trouble to contra) panel Pad , 11 Class B Data wiring may beT-tapped? or SIGA-MCR for dIoatiigtcesnannec1ing 0 0 an audible base. www.gesecurity.com Page 4of6 titarature Sheet #85001-0239 Issue? OT TO 3E USED FOR NSTALLAHON PURPOSES Specifications Catalog Number -S1GACW I SIGA-MCR SIGA-CRR I SlGA-MCRR Description Control Relay Polarity Reversal Relay Type Code Personality Code 8 (Factory Set) Address Requirements Uses 1 Module Address Current urrent Standby.=i00pA Actimed = lOOpA Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc (19 Vdc nominal) Form °C Relay Type and Hating 24 VDC = 2 amps (pilot duty) 120 Vac = 0.5 amps 220 Vac (non-UL) = 0.5 amps North American 21/2 inch North American 21/2 inch (64 mm) deep 1-gang boxes (64 mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 11/2 inch (38 mm) deep Plugs into and 11/2 inch (38 mm) deep Plugs into Mounting 4 inch square boxes U102R, U106R or U106 4 inch square boxes UI02R, U106R or U106 with 1-gang covers Motherboards with 1-gang covers Motherboards and SlGA-MP mounting and SIGA-MP mounting plates plates Construction Finish - High Impact Engineering Polymer Storage and Operating Operating Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) Environment Storage Temperature: -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C) Humidity: 0 to 93% RH LED Operation On-board Green LED - Flashes when polled On-board Red LED - Flashes when in alarm/active Compatibility Use With: Signature Loop Controller Agency Listings UL, ULC, CSFM, MEA Ordering Information Catalog Number Description Ship Weight - lbs (kg) SIGA-CR Control Relay Module (Standard Mount) - ULJULC Listed 0.4(0.15) SIGA-MCR Control Relay Module (UIO Mount) - UL Listed 0.18 (0.08) SlGA-CHR Polarity Reversal Relay Module (Standard Mount) - UL/ULC Listed 0.4(0.15) SIGA-MCRR I Polarity Reversal Relay Module (UlO Mount) - UL Listed 0.18 (0.08) Related Equipment 27193-11 Surface Mount Box - Red, 1-gang 1(0.6) 27193-16 Surface Mount Box - White, 1-gang 1(0.6) SIGA-UI02R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs - Two Module Positions 0.32 (0.15) SlGA-U106R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs - Six Module Positions 0.62 (0.28) SIGA-Ul06 Universal InputOutputModuIe.Board-. Six Module Positions 0.56 (0.25) SIGA-A84G jAudible (Sounder) Detector Base 0.3(0.15) Accessories MFC-A Multifunction Fire Cabinet iRe supports Signature Module Mounting Plates 7.0 (3.1) SIGA-MP1 Signature Module Mounting ate, 1- footprint 1.5 (0.70) SlGA-MP2 Signature Module- MoUingPlite-1/2-footprint - - - 0.5 (0.23) SIGA-MP2L Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 extended footprint 1.02 (0.46) wwwgesecurity.com Issue 7 Literature Sheet #85001-0239 Pog. 5 of 6 j .) T T( IF R I nST'_LATOFJ PURPOSES 9escription (Signature Overview) [he Signature Series intelligent analog-addressable system from GE Security is an entire family of multi-sensor detectors and mounting bases, multiple-function input and output modules, network and non- network control panels, and user-friendly maintenance and service tools. Analog information from equipment connected to Signature devices is gathered and converted into digital signals. An onboard microprocessor in each Signature device measures and analyzes the signal and decides whether or not to input an alarm. The microproces- sor in each Signature device provides four additional benefits - Self- diagnostics and History Log, Automatic Device Mapping, Stand-alone Operation and Fast, Stable Communication. Self-diagnostics and History Log - Each Signature Series device constantly runs self-checks to provide important maintenance informa- tion. The results of the self-check are automatically updated and permanently stored in its non-volatile memory. This information is accessible for review any time at the control panel, PC, or using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. The information stored in device memory includes: Device serial number, address, and type Date of manufacture, hours of operation, and last mainte- nance dat& Number of recorded alarms and troubles2 Time and date of last alarm' Most recent trouble code logged by the detector - 32 possible trouble codes may be used to diagnose faults. Automatic Device Mapping -The Signature Data Controller (SDC) learns 'here each device's serial number address is installed relative to other :111111011111tvices on the circuit The SDC keeps a map of all Signature Series devices connected to it The Signature Series Data Entry Program also uses the mapping feature. With interactive menus and graphic support, the wired circuits between each device can be examined. Layout or "as-built" drawing information showing branch wiring (T-taps), device types and their address are stored on disk for printing hard copy. This takes the mystery out of the installation. The preparation of as-built drawings is fast and efficient Device mapping allows the Signature Data Control lerto discover Unexpected additional device addresses Missing device addresses Changes to the wiring in the circuit. Most Signature modules use a personality code selected by the installer to determine their actual function. Personality codes are downloaded from the SDC during system configuration and are indicated during devicemapping___.. Standalone Operation - A decentralized alarm decision by the device is guaranteed. Onboard intelligence permits the device to operate in standalone (degrade) mode. If Signature loop controller CPU communi- cations fail for more than four seconds, all devices on that circuit go into standalone mode. The circuit acts like a conventional alarm receiving circuit Each Signature device on the circuit continues to collect and analyze information from its slave devices. When connected to a panel utilizing standalone operation, modules with their personality set as alarm devices (lDC) will alarm should their slave alarm-initiating device activate. Fast Stable Communication - Built-in intelligence means less informa- tion needs to be sent between the device and the Signature Data Controller (SDC). Other than regular supervisory polling response, Signature devices only need to communicate with the SDC when they have something new to report. This provides very fast control panel response and allows a lower baud rote (speed) to be used for commu- nication on the circuit The lower baud rate offers several advantages including: Less sensitivity to circuit wire characteristics Less sensitivity to noise glitches on the cable Less emitted noise from the data wiring Twisted or shielded wiring is not required. Diagnostic LEDs -Twin LEDs on most Signature devices provide visual indication of normal and alarm-active conditions. A flashing green LED shows normal system polling. A flashing red LED means the module is in alarm-active state. Both LEDs on steady indicates alarm-active state - standalone mode. Testing & Maintenance - Automatic self-diagnosis identifies when a Signature device is defective and causes a trouble message. The user- friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each device and other pertinent information. Single devices may be turned off temporarily, from the control panel. Scheduled maintenance (Regular or Selected) for proper system operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. Quality and Reliability - GE Security Signature devices are manufactured in North America to strict international ISO 9001 standards. All electronics utilize surface mounttechnology (SMI) forsmaller size and greater immunity to RF noise. A conformal coating is used for humidity and corrosion resistance. .EST3 V.2 only. Retrievable with SIGA-PRO programming tool. www.gesecurity.com It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We cannot cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification sheet, contact GE Security. © 2004 GE Security Printed in USA Page 6of6 Literature Sheet #85001-0239 Issue 7 One or more patents pendin% Ustings pending I. EDWAROS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Part of GE Security NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES Selectable 15 30, 75, Field Configurable - 75 r'JlOcd strobe! Horns and Strobes - 61 Series - -. Unique low-profile design - The most compact UL-1971/ULC-S526 listed strobe available W°' - Ultra slim -protrudes less than one inch from the wall - Attractive appearance 0i - No visible mounting screws Four field-configurable options in one device - Select 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd strobe output - Select high (default or low dB horn output - Select temporal (default) or steady horn output - Select public mode flash rate (default) or private mode temporal flash Unparalleled performance - Industry's most even light distribution - Meets tough synchronizing standards for strobes - Single microprocessor controls both horn and strobe - Low current draw minimizes system overhead - Independent horn control over a single pair of wires - Highly regulated in-rush current - Multiple frequency tone improves wall penetration - Industry's first temporal strobe output Description The Genesis line of signals are among the smallest, most compact audible-visible emergency signaling devices in the world. About the size of a. deck of playing cards, these devices are designed to blend with any decor. Thanks to patented breakthrough technology, GE Security Genesis strobes do not require bulky specular reflectors and lenses. Instead, an exclusive cavity design conditions lightto produce a highly controlled distribution pattern. Significant development efforts employing this new technology have given rise to a new benchmark in strobe performance - Full Lighttechnology. FuIl Light strobe technology produces a smooth light distribution pattern without the spikes and voids characteristic of specular reflectors. This ensures the entire coverage area receives consistent illumination from the strobe flash. As a result. Genesis strobes with FullLight technology go well beyond the minimum UL-required T pattern, significantly exceeding UL-1971 and ULC-S526 light distribution requirements. Although all Genesis strobes are self-synchronizing, when installed with an optional synchronization module, strobe flashes from devices on the some circuit synchronize to within 10 milliseconds of each other indefinitely. This exceeds the two-hour minimum specified in the UL standards. Only one synchronization module is required per circuit. Genesis strobes and horn-strobes offer 15 to 110 candela output, which is selectable with a conveniently-located switch on the side of the device. The candela output setting remains clearly visible even after final installation, yet it stays locked in place to prevent unauthorized tampering. Genesis horn output reaches as high as 99 dB and features a unique multiple frequency tone that results in excellent wall penetration and an unmistakable warning of danger. Horns may be configured for either coded or non-coded signal circuits. They can also be set for low dB output with ajumper cut that reduces horn output by about 5 dB. Genesis signals feature textured housings in architecturally neutral white or traditional fire red. An ingenious iconographic symbol indicates the purpose of the device. This universal symbol is code-compliant and is easily recognized by all building occupants regardless of what language they speak. Models with "FIRE" markings are also available. Easy to install S - Fits standard 1-gang electrical boxes - no trim plate needed - Optional trim plate accommodates oversized openings - - Pie-assembled with captive hardware - #12 AWG terminals -ideal for long runs or existing wiring 10 imagination at work www.gesecuritg.com 8985 TOWN CENTER PARKWAY, BRADEPITON, FL 34202 PHONE: 888-378-2329 • FAX: 866-503-3996 CANADA SALES: OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES 1001)905-270-1711; FAX 10011905-270-9553 Literature Sheet #85001-0573 Issue 3 Not to be used for installation purposes. Page 1 of 6 NOT TO BE USED FOR FISTALLAHON PURPOSES. Oplication nesis strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as wall-mounted public-mode notification appliances forthe hearing impaired. Prevailing codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise conditions exceed 105 dBA (87dBA in Canada), where occupants use hearing protection, and in areas of public accommodation as defined in the Americans with DisabilitiesAct (see application notes - USA). Combination horn-strobe signals mustbe installed in accordancewith guidelines established for strobe devices. - Strobes The following guidelines are based on ANSI/NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code (1999). When applied and installed in accordance with that code, GE Security strobes meet or exceed the illumination produced by the ADA-specified 75 candela (cd) strobe at 50 feet.* Non-Sleeping Rooms EST wall mounted strobes* Up to 20x 20(6.1 mx6.1 m) One 15 cd strobe Up to 30'x 30'(9.1 m 9.1 ml One 30 cd or two 15 cd strobes Up to 40' x 40' (12.2 mx 12.2 ml One 75 cd or two 30 cd strobes Up to 50'x 50' (15.2 m 15.2 ml One 110 cd or two 75 cd strobes Corridors Any length. Maximum width: 20'(6.1m). 15 cd strobes spaced at 100' (30.5 m) max. Strobes must be placed within 15'(4.5m) of each end of the corridor. * ADA suggests using 75 cd strobes throughout an area, with spacing that never Wn-Sleeping oeds 50 ft from the strobe to any point in the protected space. Rooms and Corridors: GE Security strobes rated at less an 110 cd per UL 1971 are intended for use in non-sleeping areas only. Install with the bottom of the device at least 80 inches 12.0 ml and no more than 96 inches (2.4 ml above the finished floor. No point in any space (including corridors) required to have strobes should be more than 50 feet (15.2 ml from the signal (in the horizontal plane). For detailed spacing requirements, consult The Handbook of Visible Notification Appliances for Fire Alarm Applications published by GE Security Press, or contact your local GE Security representative. Sleeping rooms: GE Security 110 cd strobes are intended for use in sleeping rooms and should be installed along with a smoke detector. It must be wall mounted at least 80"(2.03 ml above floor level, but no closer than 24"(610 mm) to the ceiling. The distance from the strobe to the pillow must not exceed 1614.8 ml. Sleeping Rooms EST wall mounted strobe Any size 110 cd within 16 feet of pillow Horns The suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone used with alert or alarm signals is at least 15 dB above the average ambient sound level, or 5 d above the maximum sound level having a duration of at least 60 seconds, whichever is greater, measured5. feet ItS ml above the floor. The average ambient sound level is, A-weighted sound pressure measured over a 24-hour period. Doubling the distance from the signal to the ear will theoretically result in a6 dB reduction of the received sound pressure level. The actual effect depends on the acoustic properties of materials in the space. A 3 dBA difference represents a barely noticeable change in volume. Application Notes - USA Audible signals in the public mode should never have a sound level less than 75 dBA at 1013 ml per NFPA 72. Signals cannot exceed 120 dBA per ADA and NFPA 72 at the minimum hearing distance to audible appliance. Strobe and combination horn/strobe devices should be installed with the bottom of the device at least 80 inches 12.0 ml and no more than 96 inches (2.4 ml above the finished floor. Horns should be installed with their tops not less than 6 inches (152 mm) below the ceiling and not less than 90 inches (2.3 ml above the finished floor. Strobes must be used to supplement audible signals wherever the average ambient sound level exceeds 105 dBA. Combination audible/ visual signals must be installed in accordance with NFPAguidelines established for strobes. ADA requires visible signals in the following areas: rest rooms, meeting rooms, and other common use areas. sleeping rooms intended for use by persons with hearing impairment (in accordance with Title 1 o ADA). work areas used by a person with a hearing impairment (per Title 1 of ADA). Application Notes - Canada (Based in part on 1995 Canada National Building Code) The fire alarm signal sound pressure level shall not exceed 110 dBA in any normally occupied area. The sound pressure level from an audible signal in a floor area used for occupancies other than residential occupancies shall not be less than 10 dBA above ambient levels, and never less than 65 dBA. In sleeping rooms the sound pressure level from an audible signal shall not be less than 75 dBA when any interven- ing doors between the device and the sleeping room are closed. Audible signal devices shall be installed not less than 1.8 m to the center of the device above the floor (per CAN/ULC S524). The fire alarm audible signal shall be supplemented by fire alarm strobes in any floor area where the ambient noise level exceeds 87 dBA, or where the occupants of the floor area use ear protective devices, are located within an audiometric booth, or are located within sound insulating enclosures. This also applies to assembly occupancies in which music and other sounds associated with performances could exceed 100 dBA Strobes shall be installed in a building so that the flash from one device is visible throughout the floor area or portion thereof in which they are installed. For maximum safety, GE Security recommends that strobes be installed as per the guidelines shown here under Strobe Spacing. f www.gesecurity.com Page 2 of 6 Literature Sheet #85001-0573 Issue 3 Field Configuration Temporal horn and horn-strobe models Genesis Horn/Strobe with are factory set to sound in a three-pulse optional temporal pattern. Units may be config- trim plate ured for use with coded systems by next device end of line device Polarity alarm e Note: Strobes must have continuous voltage. NOT fO BE USED FOR NSTAU.ATON PURPOSES Installation Genesis horns and strobes mount to any standard one-gang surface or flush electrical box. Matching optional trim plates are used to cover oversized openings and can accommodate one-gong, two-gang, four- inch square, or octagonal boxes, and European 100 mm square. All Genesis signals come pre.-assembled with captive mounting screws for easy Fe P installation. Two tabs at the top of the Signal unlock the cover to reveal the mounting hardware. The shallow depth of ' Genesis devices leaves ample room behind the signal for extra wiring. Once installed with the cover in place, no mounting screws are visible. cutting a jumper on the circuit board. This results in a steady output that can be turned on and off (coded) as the system applies and removes power to the signal circuit A Genesis Signal Master is required when horn-strobe models are configured for coded systems. Non- temporal, horn-only models sound a steady tone. Genesis strobes and horn-strobes are shipped from the factory ready for use as UL 1971 compliant signals for public mode operation. These signals may be configured for temporal flash by cutting ajumper on the circuit board. This battery-saving feature is intended for private mode signaling only. Genesis strobes and horn-strobes may be set for 15, 30, 75, or 110 candela output The output setting is changed by simply opening the device and sliding the switch to the desired setting. The device does not have to be removed to change the output setting. The setting remains visible through a small window on the side of the device after the cover is closed. Horns and horn-strobes are factory set for high dB output Low dB output may be selected by cutting ojumper on the circuit board. This reduces the output by about 5 dB. Wiring Field wiring terminals accommodate #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm to 2.5 mm') wiring. Horns, strobes, and combination horn-strobes are interconnected with a single pair of wires as shown below. S wwwgesecuritj.com Issue 3 Literature Sheet #85001-0573 Page 3 of 6 JOT TO BE JSED POR NSIALJATJON PURPOSES. I Secifications W )using Red or white textured UV stabilized, color impregnated engineered plastic. Exceeds 94V-0 UL flammability rating. Lens Optical grade polycarbonate (clear) Mounting Ufl Flush mount: 2'/2 inch (64 mm) deep one-gang box (indoor wall mount only) Surface mount: EST model 27193 surface mount box, wiremold box, or equivalent surface-mount box With optional trim plate: One-gang, two-gang, four-inch square, octagonal, or European single-gang box Wire connections Screw terminals: single input for both horn and strobe. #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm2 to 2.5 mm2) wire size Operating environment Indoor only: 32-120°F (0-49°C) ambient temperature. 93% relative humidity Agency UL 1971, UL 1638, UL 4.64, ULC S525, ULC S526, CSFM, CE, FCC, (MEA, FM pending). listings/approvals (All models comply with ADA Code of Federal Regulation Chapter 28 Part 36 Final Rule.) Dimensions (HxWxD) Signal: 4-1/2' x 2-3/4" x 13/16' (113 mm x 68 mm x 21 mm) Trimplate: 5"(127 mm); Height-5-7/8° (149 mm); Depth— ½" (13 mm) G1-HD series temporal-tone horns: non-coded, filtered 16-33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR (or coded when horn set to steady tone) Operating voltage G1-HDVM series temporal-tone horn-strobes: non-coded, filtered 16-33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR (or coded (audible NAC only) when used with optional G1M Genesis Signal Master) G1-VM series strobes: non-coded, filtered 16- 33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR G1-P series steady-tone horns: coded or non-coded, filtered 20-31 Vdc or unfiltered 20-27 Vfwr Strobe output rating UL 1971, UL 1638, ULC S526: selectable 15 cd, 30 cd, 75 cd, or 110 cd output G 1 -VM strobes and G 1-HDVM series temporal-tone horn-strobes: one flash per second synchronized with Strobe flash rate optional G1M Genesis Signal Master indefinitely within 10 milliseconds (or self-synchronized within 200 milliseconds over thirty minutes on a common circuit without G1M Genesis Signal Master) Temporal setting (private mode only): synchronized to temporal output of horns on same circuit Compatible synchronization G1M, G1M-RM, SIGA-CC1S, SIGA-MCC1S modules* G1-HD temporal-tone horns and G1-HDVM series temporal-tone horn-strobes: temporal rate synchronized Horn pulse rate with optional Gi M Genesis Signal Master indefinitely within 10 milliseconds (or self-synchronized within 200 milliseconds over thirty minutes on a common circuit without G1M Genesis Signal Master) W\ [emporal audible pattern G1-P steady-tone horns: continuous, steady tone only ½ sec ON, ½ sec OFF, ½ sec ON, ½ sec OFF, ½ sec ON, 1½ sec OFF, then repeat cycle h',t ,-nr,,n-,tihia ,,ifh (1-O cariac hhrn. Average Sound Output (d BA) (High dB setting. cnechok, 24V, measured at loft) dBAoutput Temporal Horns. Horn-strobes 1G1-HD. G1-HDVM seriesi - High dB Setting UL464 Average Peak Temporal I Steady Temporal/Steady Temporal/Steady 16 Vdc 81.4 85.5 91.4 94.2 24 Vdc 84.4 88.6 94.5 97.8 33 Vdc 86.3 90.4 96.9 99.5 Temporal Horns, Horn-strobes (Gi-HO, G1-HDVM series) - Low dB Settina U1464 Average Peak Temporal I Steady Temporal/Steady Temporal/Steady 16 Vdc 76.0 80.1 86.3 89.2 24 Vdc 79.4 83.5 89.8 92.5 33 Vdc 82.1 86.5 92.5 95.3 Light output - (effective cd) Steady Tone Horns (GI-P series) - Percent of UL rating versus angle U1464 Average Peak - 16Vdc 77 90 91 -'--- . - 124 Vdc 77 90 - '----- - - -. -- -. / 33Vdc 77 90 91-- --- - Notes -- ----- ____ All values shown are dBA measured at1O feet l3.olml. - -- - \-- - --- - - -- - UL464 values measured in reverberation room. Average and Peak values are measured in anechoic chamber. www.gesecurity.com Page 4 of 6 Literature Sheet #85001-0573 Issue 3 NOT TO BE USED FOR INSrALLAcION PURPOSES Current Draw Strobes, Horn-Strobes Multi-cd Wall Strobes (G1-VM) UL Nameolate Ratinu (UL1971. Effective MaY 2004) 15 e 30 c 75 e 110 c RMS RMS RMS RMS 16Vdc 103 141 255 311 16Vfwr 125 179 346 392 Typical Current Measured by EST) 15 c 30 c 75 c 110 c RMS Mean RMS Mean RMS Mean RMS Mean 16Vdc 85 79 't27 124 245 243 285 283 20Vdc 71 66 98 96 188 186 240 238 24Vdc 59 55 82 80 152 150 191 190 33Vdc 46 44 64 63 112 111 137 136 16Vfwr 119 64 169 97 332 203 376 240 2OVfwr 103 51 143 76 253 150 331 198 24Vfwr 94 44 129 65 218 121 262 152 33Vfwr 87 37 112 52 179 89 205 106 Multi-cd Wall Temporal Horn-strobes (G1-HDVM) - High dB Setting HL Nameolate Ratina lUL1971. Effective May 20041 15 c 30 c 75 c 110 c RMS RMS RMS RMS 281 337 397 443 - 15cd - 30 c lSct 110 e RMS Mean RMS Mean RMS Mean RMS Mean 16Vdc 102 89 135 129 246 242 309 305 20Vdc 88 77 109 104 193 190 248 243 24Vdc , 81 71 94 90 161 '158 203 200 33Vdc 74 64 72 74 124 121 154 151 16Vtwr 144 77 182 106 352 212 393 249 20Vfwr 141 68 162 87 274 158 362 210 24Vfwr 136 65 152 76 235 133 282 165 33Vfwr 125 54 144 65 201 101 232 123 Multi-cd Wall Temporal Horn-strobes (G1-HDVM) - Low dB Setting HL Namenlate Ratina 1UL1971 - Effective May 2004) 15 c 30 c 75 e llocd RMS RMS 214... 330 383 429 Horns Wall Temporal Horns (G1-HD) III Namenlate Ratinn 1111AM Fffective May 2004) High dB Low dB RMS RMS 16Vdc 26 19 24Vdc 36 27 33Vdc 41 33 16Vfwr 51 37 24Vfwr 69 52 33Vfwr 76 70 Tvical Current (Measured by EST) High dB Low dB RMS Mean RMS Mean 16Vdc 22 17 17 14 20Vdc 24 19 19 16 24Vdc 27 21 22 18 33Vdc 32 25 26 22 16Vfwr 34 15 30 14 20 Vfwr 40 19 34 16 24Vfwr 45 21 38 18 33V1wr 52 24 47 22 Wall Horns (G1-P) UL Nameplate Rating Measured by EST RM I Mean 1 I RMS I Mean I 16Vdc 9 7 24Vdc 11 9 33Vdc 13 11 16Vfwr 9 5 24Vfwr 10 7 33Vfwr 11 9 Notes and Comments 1. Current values are shown in MA 2. UL Nameplate Rating can vary from Typical Current due to measurement methods and instruments used. GE Security recommends using the Typical Current for system design including NAC and Power Supply loading and voltage drop calculations. Use the Vdc EMS current ratings for filtered power supply and battery AH calculations. Use the Vfwr RMS current ratings for unfiltered power supply calculations. Fuses, circuit breakers and other overcurrent protection devices are typically rated for current in RMS values. Most of these devices operate based upon the heating affect of the current flowing through the device. The RMS current (not the mean current) determines the heating affect and - therefore, the trip and hold threshold for those devices. Our industry has used 'mean' currents over the years. However, UL will direct the industry to use the 2004 RMS values in the future. [i&vcic 129 - 167 16Vfwr 176 230 Typical Current (Measured by EST) -- RMS RMS 160 ----:--. 16 Vtwr 162 216 Typical-Current (Measured by EST) 15cd. 30 c 75 c 110 c Mean RMS Mean RMS Mean RMS Mean ---16-Vdc96T--84 130 124 243 240 302 297 - _2OVdc -79 70 104 99 189 186 241 237 2tVdc —68— —61-- —88 -- —84 156 154 197 193 33Vdc 56 52 7f T6W 118 116 l46 143 '16Vfwr - 128 69 180 104 344 204 389 244 2OVtwr 118 60 157 84 266 156 343 200 , 24Vtwr 113 54 144 74 230 128 279 161 33Vfwr- - 112- 48 137 64 197 99 226 117 24Vdc 10 10 24Vdc 11 11 31Vdc 12 12 2OVfwr 9 8 24Vfwr 10 9 www.gesecurit!J.com Issue 3 literature Sheet #85001-0573 Page 5 of 6 rderin_Information Catalog Number Description Ship Wt. lbs (kg) White Finish Red Fmish G1-HDVM G1R-HDVM Genesis Horn-Strobe (selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd output, selectable high/low dB output) G1-VM G1R-VM Genesis Strobe (selectable 15,30,75, or 110 cd output) G1-HD G1R-HD Genesis Temporal Horn (selectable high/low dB output) G1-P G1R-P Genesis Steady Horn (not compatible with Genesis Signal Master) 0.25 (0:11) G1F-HDVM G1RF-HDVM Genesis Horn-Strobe (selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd output, selectable high/low dB output) —with FIRE marking G1F-VM G1RF-VM Genesis Strobe (selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd output)—with 'FIRE' marking G1F-HD ' G1RF-HD Genesis Temporal Horn (selectable high/low dB output) —with "FIRE' marking G1F-P G1RF-P Genesis Steady Horn with 'FIRE" marking (not compatible with Genesis Signal Master) Nor so at USED FOR iNSTAtLATON PURPOSES RA-..nt-. Anaccnrrnc G1T GiRT Genesis Trim Plate (for two-gang or 4 square boxes) 0.15 (0.7) G1T-FIRE G1 RI-FIRE Genesis Trim Plate (for two-gang or 4" square boxes) with "FIRE' markings 0.15 (0.7) 27193-16 27193-11 One-gang surface mount box 1(0.4) C,n.krnni.,,tinn Mntli.Iac G1M Genesis Signal Master—Snap-on Mount 0.2 (0.1) G1M-RM Genesis _Signal _Master - Remote _Mount (1-gang) SlGA-CC1S Intelligent Synchronization Output Module (2-gang) 0.5 (0.23) SIGA-MCC1S Intelligent Synchronization Output Module (Plug-in UIO) 0.18 (0.08) I , FIRE i.a1 Genesis Horn-Strobes may be ordered in red or white, with orwithout'FIRE' marking. -- WARNING: These devices will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruptions, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire- protection specialist These visible signal appliances' flash intensity may not be adequate to alert or awaken occupants in the protected area. Research indicates that the intensity of strobe needed to awaken 90% of sleeping persons is approximately 100 cd. GE Security recommends that strobes in sleeping rooms be 110 cd minimum. enesis and FullUght Strobe Technology are trademarks of GE Security. Inc - www.gesecurity.com it is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate oil requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact GE Security. © 2005 GE SeCU(ItI Pnnted in USA Page 6 of 6 LIterature Sheet #85001-0573 Issue 3 .r EDWAROS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Part of GE Security INTELLIGENT INITIATING DEVICES MPG Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector SIGA-SD Features U Less than 2' deep for easy installation and applications where space is tight U -20 to 158°F (-29 to 70 °C) operating range with, 100 ft/mm. to 4,000 ft/min airvelocity rating assures reliability under harsh environmental conditions U Status LEDs remain visible through clear assembly cover U Cover monitor switch for added security U Standard sampling tube spacing for easy drop-in migration from other detectors Sampling tube can be installed with or without the cover in place and can be rotated in 45-degree increments to ensure proper alignment with duct airflow 1 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc operation U Magnet-activated test switch U One Form C auxiliary alarm relay for controlling ancillary equipment (e.g.. HVAC controls) U No special tools required for easy access to field connections U Signature Series intelligence Non-volatile memory U Automatic device mapping Electronic addressing Self diagnostics U Standaloneaperation U Environmental compensation with differential sensing for reliable, stable, and drift-free sensitivity U Wide 0.79% to 2.46% obscuration/ft smoke sensitivity U Identification of dirty or defective detectors Description The GE Security SuperDuct Signature Series smoke detector is the most advanced and most reliable device in its class. Designed for easy installation and superb reliability, SuperDuct represents the perfect balance of practical design and advanced technology. SuperDuct detectors feature a unique design that speeds installation and simplifies maintenance. Removable dustfilters, conformolly coated circuit boards, and optional water-resistant gaskets keep contaminants away from components, ensuring years of trouble-free service. When cleaning is required. the assemblies come apart easily and snap back together in seconds. A Signature Series photoelectric sensor is incorporated into the design of each SIGA-SD duct smoke detector. This sensor inherits the power and benefits of this exceptional line of intelligent devices. Signotire.Seriessensors.gother analog information from their smoke sensing elements and convert it into digital signals. The sensor meos- uresTondanalyses these signals and compares the information to historical readings and time patterns to make an alarm decision. Digital filters-removesiggal patteros that are not typical of fires. which virtually eliminates unwanted alarms. - E1ke oltSiriature detectors. the SIGA-SD features electronic addressing and.issuesadivtgsensoLwarning.when itreaches its preset limit The drtsensrwamjngin'dicatesthesensoris operating within its -- = specified limits but is in need brsrcii erthdetecfo?abilrty to compensate for environmental changes has reached its limit the duct smoke detector signals trouble condition. S 0 imagination at work www.gesecurity.com 8985 TOWN CENTER PARKWAY, BRADENTON, FL 34202 PHONE: 888-378-2329 • FAX: 866-503-3996 CANADA SALES. OWEN SOUND. ON 519-376-243Ct FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES 10011905-270-1711; FAX (0011905-270-9553 Uteratore Sheet #85001-0584 Issue 3 Not to be used for instoitation purposes. Page SofA NO TO BE USED EDE INSPLLATtON PIJRPDSES. e SIGA-SD also uses differential sensing to prevent gradual environ- ntal changes from triggering unwanted alarms. A rapid change in nvironmental conditions, such as smoke from a fire, causes the detector to signal an alarm state, but dust and debris accumulated over time does not change alarm sensitivity. Each Signature Series SuperDuct detector contains a microprocessor that performs comprehensive self-diagnostics and stores the results in nonvolatile memory. Stored results include details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, and number of alarms and troubles. This information can be retrieved and reviewed when desired. The detector assembly cover provides easy access to the smoke sensor, its wiring connections, sample and exhaust tubes, and the smoke chamber itself. Air enters the detector's sensing chamber through a sampling tube (ordered separately) that extends into the duct and is directed back into the ventilation system through an exhousttube (included). The differ- ence in air pressure between the two tubes pulls the sampled air through the sensing chamber. When a sufficient amount of smoke is detected in the sensing chamber, the detector initiates an alarm. The sampling tube may be installed from either the duct side of the assembly or from inside the sensor compartment, as preferred by the installer. (The exhaust tube must be installed from the duct side.) Sampling tubes may be rotated in 45-degree increments so that air- holes can be aligned to allow the unit to be mounted at virtually any angle relative to the air flow. In installations where the duct smoke detector's controls and indicators are hidden from view, a remote test station or an LED indicator can be connected to the detector to provide these functions. emote Test Stations Labor-saving RernoteTest/Reset stations provide alarm testing from the convenience of a remote location. Tests can be performed quickly and safely - without having to climb to the roof. Magnetically- __ operated and key-operated one-gang models are available. Signature SuperDuct detectors are also i compatible with SlGA-LED remote alarm LED. Application SuperDuct detectors are ideally suited to duct smoke detection applications where early indication of combustion is required within the confined space of ventilation ductwork. Its primary purpose is to provide early warning of an impending fire and to prevent smoke from circulating throughout the building. It is typically used to detect smoke in the supply side of the HVAC system but -can pftiide supervision of the return side as well. 1 Protected premises I Remote Alarm relay test I output station DuatsmokeH Rum air HVACT unit ...6- __________ Duct smoke Supply detector air Alarm relay Remote output test 11 FACP -------------------------- station SuperDuct detectors continually sample airflow in the HVAC duct and initiate on alarm condition whenever smoke is detected. An alarm is activated when the quantity (percentobscurotion) of combustion products in thatairsample exceedsthedetector'ssensitivity setting. Air velocity in the duct as low as 100 ft/mm. maintains adequate airflow into the sensor smoke chamber through air holes in the air sampling tube and discharges through the exhaust tube. SuperDuct air sampling tubes must be installed with the inlet holes facing the airstream. Sampling tubes may be rotated in 45-degree increments so that air- holes can be aligned to allow the unit to be mounted in virtually any angle relative to the airflow. SuperDuct sensors are engineered to operate optimally under the harsh environmental conditions frequently found in HVAC ductwork. Nonetheless, before installing the detector, testthe duct air velocity, temperature, and humidity to verify that it is within the operating range of the SuperDuct detector. Consult the SuperDuct installation sheet for details. - WARNING: Duct detectors have specific limitations. Duct detectors are not a substitute for an open area smoke detector. Duct detectors are not substitute for early warning detection or a replacement for a building's regular fire detection system. Smoke detectors are not designed to detect toxic gases which can build up to hazardous levels in some fires. These devices will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruptions, GE Security suggests you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. www.gesecurity.com Page 2 of 4 Literature Sheet #85001-0584 Issue 3 #10 sheet metal screw (2X) T 3 D P - SALLAThOJ PuRP)E; Assembly Sampling tube socket Exhaust tube socket Detector Airth Mo' intinri LI Alarm [®- i SIGA-LED [11 I Alarm I SD-TRK I Test or SD-TRM[1] -_JIi I I I I I Exhaust tube ,\) Thin gasket Thick gasket k Coupling Sampling tube (ordered separately) Plug vvii ag 30ut(—) 3 Out (~) 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 0000 , Power indicator - Alarm indicator Notes [11 No more than one remote test station or LED indicator can be connected to the detector at the same time. Wiring is unsupervised. Maximum wire resistance is 10 ohms per wire. www.gesecurity.com issue 3 Literature Sheet #85001-0584 Page 3 of' ecificcitions, detector 8.70 x 5.45 x 1.90 inches Dimensions (221 x138x48mm) Wire size 14 to 22 AWG Smoke detection method Photoelectric (light scattering principle) Air velocity rating 100 to 4-660 ft/min Air pressure differential 0.005 to 1.00 inches of water Sensitivity 0.79 to 2.46 %/ft obscuration Alarm test response time 5 seconds LED indicators Alarm (red), Power (green) Unsupervised and power-limited Common alarm relay Quantity: 1 Type: Form C Ratings: 2.0 A at 30 Vdc (resistive) Operating voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc Standby: 45 pA Operating current Ala rm: 45 pA Inrush: 1 mA Standalone alarm: 18 mA Temperature: -20 to 158 °F Operating environment (-29 to 70 °C) Humidity 93% RH, noncondensing Agency listings UL, ULC, CSFM Ordering Information Catalog Number Description Ship M. lb. (kg) SIGA-SD Intelligent SuperDuct Detector 2.4 (1.1) Aessnris SD-T8 8-inch sampling tube 0.5 (0.2) SD-118 18-inch sampling tube 1.5 (0.7) SD-T24 24-inch sampling tube 2.7 (1.2) SD-T36 36-inch sampling tube 3.0 (1.4) SD-T42 42-inch sampling tube 3.5(l.6) SD-T60 1604nch sampling tube - 5.8 (2.6) SD-178 78-inch sampling tube 7.5 (3.4) SD-T120 120-inch sampling tube 11.5(5.2) SIGA-LED Remote alarm LED 1.0 (0.5) SD-TRM Remote test station, magnetic 1.0 (0.5) SD-TRK - emote-test station, keyed 1.0 (0.5) SD-V11( Air velocity test kit (stoppers only, etc) 1.0 (0.5) SD-GSK Cover gasket kit 0.5 (0.2) SD-MAG Test magnet kit 0.5 (0.2) SlGA-SDPCB RiliiriiiiTCWSiñtiire sensor kit 1.0 (0.5) O1 10 SE USED P0R INSTASLAr!ON PIJRPOSES Specifications, test stations Remote Test/Reset Stations provide alarm test, trouble indication, and reset capability from a remote location. They include a one-gang plate. momentary SPST switch, red alarm LED, and terminal block Magneti- cally-operated models (TRM) or key-operated models (IRK) are available. Compatible electrical North American 1-gang box boxes Standard 4-in square box, 1-1/2 inches deep, with 1-gang cover LED indicators Alarm (red) LED type Clear lens Wire size 14 to 22 AWG Resistance per wire 10 Ohms, max. Current requirements See controller specifications LED circuit ratings Voltage: 3 Vdc, max. Current: 30 mA, max. Switch ratings Voltage: 125 Vdc, max. (SD-TRK) Current: 4 A, max. Switch ratings Voltage: 200 Vdc, max. (SD-TRM) Current: 0.5 A, max. Compatible detectors SuperDuct conventional two-wire and Signature duct smoke detectors Operating environment Temperature: 32 to 131 °F (0 to 55 °C) Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing Storage temperature -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60 °C) Agency listings I UL, ULC, CSFM f. www.gesecurity.com It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact GE Security. 02005 GE Security Punted fl USA Page4of4 LiteratureSheet#85001-0584 Issue 3 0 imagination at work EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Part of GE Security SECURITY/ACCESS CONTROL Card Reader Controller Model: CRC, CRCXM Features Listed for fire, security, and access control U Support of Wiegand output devices - Proximity, Mag Stripe, etc. Total support for one door U Two supervised device circuits Integral standby battery Supports maglock and strike operation PIN pad support and schedule U Memory for 8,000136,000 cardholders Self-contained operation U Maintains all schedules and holidays U No degraded mode needed Description The Card Reader Controller (CRC) provides the power and electronics required to monitor and control a single door with both entry and exit readers. The unit is designed to mount in close proximity to the door it controls, however it can be located remotely from the readers in retrofit applications. The unit is housed in an off-whte Cycoloy' housing. Its attractive design allows for surface mounting in exposed areas. All access decisions are made locally in the CRC. The CRC's non-volatile memory can hold schedules and holiday information for up to 8.000 cardholders. The CRCXM has additional memory, and supports 36,000 cardholders. The memory also retains the last 5,000/20,000 events for logging purposes. This history information is uploaded at the request of the access control database for use in a variety of reports. The unit provides 12 Vdc © ½ amp for doorstnke or magnetic lock requirements. An integral standby battery can provide up to four hours of service for applications that use electric door strikes. An integral tamper switch is also provided. Two input circuits are provided for security devices. These are typically used to monitor door position and request to exit devices. Input circuits can also be configured as a buzz in switch to manually unlock the door, or as security input points when used with Synergy-enabled EST3. www.gesecurity.com 898$ TOWN CENTER PARKWAY, BRADENTON, FL 34202 PHONE: 888-378-2329 • FAX: 866-503-3996 CANADA SALES: OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-243Ct FAX 519-375-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES: (001)905-270-1711: FAX (001)905-270-9553 Literature Sheet 500t0528 Issue S Not to be used for installation purposes. Page 1of 6 U Aesthetically pleasing design U Integrates with EST3 and ACDB-KE systems N Can initiate system activity U Can respond to system activity U Handicapped option facilitates barrier-free operation U Systemtlmers U Door ajar Egress time U Construction card U Anti passback options U Two-man rule U Muster U Escort/visitor U Optional sounder Greatfor retrofit U Can useexisting cards and readers NOT TO BE LSED FOR IN5TA.LAHON PURPOSES andicapped feature output is provided to operate mechanical door eners with extended door-open times. This output is activated when cardholder with the disabled option activated presents their card to the reader, helping provide barrier-free access. Credential Reader Support The CRC(XM) is compatible with most credential readers such as proximity and biometric devices having a standard Wiegand output Each CRC is capable of controlling both the ingress and egress readers for a single door. Multiple readers for ingress and egress are supported simply by parallelling the readers. This can allow the use of multiple card types at a single door. CRCs provide support for a Construction Card. This feature facilitates system testing and an extra level of security until a database is downloaded into the CRC. Once the CRC has a cardholder database downloaded into it, the construction card automatically becomes deactivated The CRC provides LED drivers to visually indicate whether access is granted or denied. These generate different LED flash rates when PIN numbers or a second card (two-man rule/escorted visitor) is required. A driver for an audible sounder is also provided by the CRC. Access Levels, Schedules, and Holidays An access level is a name assigned to a group of cardholders that share common access privileges. These privileges consist of a list of doors, each with a specified schedule. Any combination of doors can be assigned to an access level. The CRC(XM) supports 1,200 different access levels (up to 255 per tenant, up to 255 per ACDB-KE system), and each cardholder can belong to two access levels at the same time. The CRC maintains in its memory all access levels, schedules and Solid ays, created by the Access Control Database Program. Each :hedule identifies the specific timelsl(in 15-minute increments) and ay(s) during which specific cardholders are permitted through a given door. The CRC(XM) can store up to 1,200 schedules (up to 255 per tenant) and 1.200 holidays (up to 255 per tenant). Holidays are exceptions to normal Monday through Sunday schedules, when different access requirements are desired. Many holidays can be programmed using rules rather than fixed dates. This minimizes year- to-year programming required to update holidays annually. Fixed holidays, such as January 1st that fall on a Saturday or Sunday can automatically be scheduled for the closest Monday or Friday to coincide with statutory holidays. Database Management (Synergy-enabled EST311 Each CRC(XM) contains the entire access control database within its mémory.This distribution of intelligence minimizes traffic on the network, maximizing access decision speeds. Cardholder data is created and stored in the Access Control Database (ACDB) or ACDB-KE software program that runs on any PC (see the ACDB catalog sheet or ACDB-KE catalog sheet). This information is then encrypted and sent to the CRCs by a hardwire or dial-up connection. In a network environment, the PC is simply equipped with a conven- tional modem. The ACDB program then dials up the network and sends the encrypted database information via the network to the individual CRCs. This allows a ACDB to serve multiple sites. Dial-up data entry also permits multiple tenants to share a common access control system without sharing a common database. PCs may also be directly con- nected to the system using a direct serial connection. Database Management (ACDB-KE Systems) ACDB-KE standalone keyless entry systems communicate with CRCs via hardwired RS-232 to RS-485 converters. Note: Not all CRC features described are supported by all compatible software. Please refer to the software catalog sheets and manuals to determine functionality. www.gesecurity.com Page 2 of 6 Literature Sheet #85001-0528 issue 5 NO TO BE USED FOR LNSTALLAflON PURPOSES Applications Card Reader Controllers support Synergy-enabled EST3 control platforms under EST's Access Control Database (refer to catalog sheet 85010-0098), and ACDB-KE standalone keyless entry systems under the ACDB-KE software program (refer to catalog sheet 85010-0132). Application (Synergy-enabled) True integration permits system functions to interact seamlessly, such as unlocking exit doors during a fire. A simple program rule unlocks doors, replacing additional conduit, wiring and interposing relays. Want to disarm security partitions automatically when an authorized cardholder enters the building? Integration and another system rule easily provides a solution. Because each CRC makes its own access decisions, very little network traffic is generated by the access control function. This, along with the integrated design of the network operating system ensures that fire signals always receive the highest priority. To reduce traffic even further, the CRC can be configured to report only denied or irregular events. There is no degradation in system performance when both fire and security devices are installed on the some network. The CRC(XM) uses the some high quality components used in our fire devices, and is UL- listed to fire (UL-864/ULC-S527), card access (UL-294) and burglary (UC- 609/ULC-S303)standards. The Cord Reader Controllers and Keypad Displays (KPDISP*) are connected to the system over a supervised, dedicated RS-485 connec- tion to the Security Access Control Module (3-SAC). Each 3-SAC can support up to 62 CRCs or KPDlSPs. This is multi-drop circuit and does not require a home run for each device. Should network communica- tions be last, the CRC will continue to grant access based an the complete database stored in its memory, without loss of any security feature, except possibly anti-passback, two-man rule, and muster operations. For these type of applications a Class A/Style 6 configura- tion can be installed. In Class A the maximum number of devices on the 3-SAC is 30, providing continued uninterrupted operation in the event of most wiring faults. Networked Applications Access controlled doors can be grouped into one of 255 partitions. Partitions are used to define the protection for a given area. This facilitates arming and disarming of security alarms, as well as anti- passbock, two-man rule, and muster operation. Each CRC can support one partition. As part of an integrated system, CRCs can be programmed to automati- cally bypass alarm points, eliminating one of the most common causes of false alarms. Integration also permits the system to be programmed to automate routine functions such as turning on lights and adjusting - - room temperature. Up to 255 tenants are supported by the CRC. During system installation. the available schedules and holidays are allocated to each one. The use of individual access contra) database programs and dial-up modem connections simplifies the addition of a new tenants or the reconfiguring of existing ones. Doors located at remote sites are supported using dial-up modem connections. No local dedicated PC or computer wiring is required for database transactions. Elevator floor access control is accomplished using the CRC and the EST3 integrated system. Because the fire portion of the system is already interconnected with the elevator controller for elevator capture functions, floor access control is a simple extension of this pre-existing function. The CRC(XM) is listed to UL-864, the fire alarm standard, to UL-294, the access control system unit standard, and to UL-609/ULC-S303 burglar alarm standards. This raises the level of the access control components up to the high standards of fire alarm equipment and permits fire, security, and access control-functions to be fully integrated while assuring all listing and code requirements are met The CRC's flexibility supports three different versions of anti-possback: strict, timed, and logged. Strict anti-passback requires the use of an exit reader and will not permit reuse of a card until it has been used to exit the area. In order to eliminate the need for an exit reader, the timed anti-passback mode prohibits the reuse of the card for a predeter- mined time period. This virtually eliminates users passing a card back to a second user, this is the origin of the anti-passback feature. The logged anti-passback mode permits access, but logs any violation to history for future employee counselling. When an area is served by more than one door, a networked system is required to provide support for two-man rule operation, muster operation, and strict anti-passback. The network coordinates user information between CRCs that serve a common area. Application (ACDB-KE Keyless Entry) The CRC provides effective support for standalone applications in conjuction with ESTs ACDB-KE keyless entry software package. ACDB- KE can accommodate up to 31 doors. It offers many of the standard access control features found in the ACDB including cardholder-specific access privileges, multiple access levels, customizable schedules, and holiday rules. - - - - ACDB-KE offers no security functions. However, CRC Farm-C relays can be configured to trigger external door openers, or they can be programmed to interface with third-party security systems. To achieve security functionality, the relay can be set to change state if no REX, valid card read, or unlock timer is in-effect-when the door is opened. When -- connected to a security system, this allows the use of the door position contact asa security input -- ---- - - - - ACDB-KE communicates with the CRCvid h'-rd-wired RS-232 to R5485 converters. * See KPDISP literature for a full description of the functionality offered by the keypad display www.gesecurity.com Issue 5 Literature SheetS8SOO1-0528 Page 3 of 6 NOT TO BE USED FOR INSTALLATION PURPOSES. UL, ULC (See Note 1) Door Capacity Each CRC(XM) serves one door - one ingress reader/keypad, one egress reader/keypad, one lock mechanism, and required request to exit devices. Credential Reader Compatibility Any Wiegand output device including proximity, magnetic stripe. Wiegand. Barium Ferrite. & biometric readers with Wiegand outputs, Keypad Compatibility Any reader with integral keypad using the Dorado® 8-bit keypad format. Input Circuits Two supervised. Configurable for request to exit button/PIR motion detector, security input, or "bun if switch. Network programmable bypass, arm/disarm Lock Control Power 12 Vdc @ 0.5A, max Lock Types supported Configurable for continuous (mag-lock) or pulse (strike) operation Supervision Strikes are supervised for presence Delay Programmable exit delay Reader Power 12 Vdc @ 0.5A. max. Cardholder Capacity CRC = 8,000; CRCXM = 36,000 Schedules & Holidays 1,200 schedules and 1,200 holidays. Each tenant in an integrated system, or each ACDB-KE system, can be assigned up to 255 schedules and 255 holidays. Anti-Passback Networked = 62 doors per partition on the same 3-SAC 2-Man Rule Networked = 62 doors per partition on the same 3-SAC Partitions Networked = 255 Muster operation 61 doors per partition on the same 3-SAC Event Memory CRC = 5,000 events, CRCXM = 20,000 events; configurable for all, denied, or irregular events Network Communications RS-485, Class A or Class B 4,000ft (1,220m) maximum circuit length (3-SAC) Keyless Entry Communications RS-232 to RS-485: Use B&B Electronics Model 485CSP2 or equivalent (Note: Port powered RS-232 to 485 ACDB-KE computer to CRCs converters are not recommended. Always use converters with external power supplies.) USB to RS-485: Use B&B Electronics Model USTL4 or equivalent TCP/IP to RS-485: Use EST NETCOM-1 S I'ocal Sounder (CRCSND) Optional piezo sounder configurable for door ajar and unauthorized entry/exit - 12 Vdc @ 7mA orm C Relay Contact (30 Vdc/ac @ 2A, resistive) to operate system auxiliary functions including automatic door openers Supervision Input Circuits Class B monitored for opens, shorts & normal conditions Tamper Cover monitored for normal & open conditions AC Fail Monitored for loss of AC power Low Battery Monitored for low battery voltage during primary power loss Strike Monitored for open 6 normal conditions when door is locked Reader Monitored for open and normal conditions CPU/Memory Monitored for internal failures, erase or write failures Network Communications Monitored by the network - - Internal Clock 24 hour clock. Automatically synchronized on networks Power Requirements from 310 mA + (Lock current @ 12 Vdc) + (Reader Current @ 12 Vdc) + (CRCSND current, if used). 24 Vdc source CRC(XM) Transformer Powered Max. AC power will not exceed 40 VA @ 120 Vac Wire Size 14 to 22 AWG (1.5 mm2 to 0.25mm2) See Note 2. Standby Battery 12V @1.2AH (approximately 4 hours standby w/strike - standby time may vary depending on door traffic) Operating Environment 0°C to 49° Complete (32°F to 120°F) @93%RH. Non-condensing Housing Off-white Cycoloy® Thermoplastic - - . - - Dimensions (HWD) 4.75" x 8.0" x 2.5" (12.0cm x 205crix6:4crn):.. Mounting Surface mount. Optional 4:' square o0-gang or 100mm2 electrical box Note 1: The EST3 is modularly listed under the following standards: UL 864 categories: UOJZ, UOXX, UUKL and SYZV, UL 294categortj-ALW;UE 609c0té ry-AOTXUL 636 category ANET-UL-1076 cctegory-APOU. UL 365 category APAW,UL1610 category AMCx,UL1635 category AMCX - - - ULC-S527, ULC-5301, ULC-S302, ULC-S303, ULC-S304, ULC-S306. ULC/0RO-C1076; ULCIORD-C693 Please refer to EST3 Installation and Service Manual for complete system requirements. 9-ote 2: hen wiring between CRCs is installed outside as between two buildings, surge protection is needed on the CRC wires leaving and entering the building. Use Ditek's Surge Protector Model 2LVLP. www.gesecurity.com Page 4 of 6 Literatiire Sheet 18500i-0528 issue 5 Decifications It .gency Listings Typical Wiring Synergy Enabled Applications to I— 1 0 3z O Z 0 > > > > a TS-1 + + ? .AH 9 10 0 5 z a. 01 Co IOl a D 2fl12 I— 0 Ui ..I ZI wio 0 aij0LUl< I 31 iao. a aLu 110W0 llcllt Reader wire connections CRC terminal block numbers (designators) Reader manufacturers 10 (Reader power) 11 (Reader GND) 12 (Data 0) :I 13 (Data 1) L 14 RED LED 15 GREEN LED 16 (Sound 2 EST I HIDA3 Red Black Green I White Brown Orange Yellow Motorola lndata& Red Black Green White Brown — Blue Dorado - Red Black Green White Brown - Yellow Sensor Eng. Red Black Green I White Violet Brown Blue Karl Red Black Green White Brown Orange Blue Radio Key /\ Red Black Green White Brown Orange Blue Paradox/Position Technology Red Black Green White Orange Yellow Brown CRC 2 twisted pair (24 Vdc and 3-SAC bus) CRC JOT TO SE USED FOR INsTALLArIoN PURPOSES. 62 EST 3 2 twisted pair (24 Vdc and 3-SAC bus) I6.5WctN 1 Dry ontact TB'-2 I connectIons From strikeimagicok! access mlaYL\ Accessory - - -; To rest CRC or relay, I mounting I other device Spam II From power supply I From AClload terminals on plug-in transformer (CRCXF) 'Note: The ground terminal on the transformer is not used. - _-----=Red battery —Blact 0To Control Bus 47K 47)( EOL EC L From control panel or previous device To next device or 1200 EOL it this a the last device on Class Bar back to 3-W 7 si module f Class A. Tamper switch. Engaged when the cover in installed and activates when the cover is removed. Ct>— 2 twisted pair (24 Vdc and 3-SAC bus) To next CRC orKPDISP Cont!"DI Panel 24 Vdc CRC 24 Vdc Jumper Setup InteiTnilant power Continuous power (using strike) --i r— (using maglock or continuously powered strike) JP1D®®I JP21®®®I Inputsource AC power I I oc power (from transformer) Mcim panel) Notes: Al If used as an inside reader, connect the green wire to 181- 13 and the white wire toTB1-12. Connect wiring only when using the reader's sounder. Program for dual-LED control. Use a 4.71(0. 114 watt resistor It no strike is being used to maintain supervision. When magloolt or door strike voltage or current is outside CRC(XM) operational parameters, use an accessory relay (catalog number CRCRL) and a Sated external power supply to power the lock. Refer to the accessory relay's installation sheet (3100294) for more information. AS I6nus common from control panel must be maintained Additional Power Supply 24 Vdc + - CRC - CRC 24 Vdc 24 Vdc Typical Wiring ACDB-KEAplications -. CRCXF Trsnalonner CRC CRC 24Vdc 24Vdc i;& so,,aw I So awl 50.ww Dftk 1b r" 23ZMS CRC CRC CRC - Ac (circa,) Note 1 Three wires = 1 common, 1 twisted pair RS-485 with 6 twists per ft mm. See literature sheet 85010-0132 for additional ACo8-KEdrawings - www.gesecuritg.com Issue 5 Literature Sheet #85001-0528 Page 5 of 6 NO' TO BE OTT) FOR NSTALOHOFJ PURPOSES. t gineering Specification ergy Enabled Applications The Card Reader Controller (CRC) shall provide the power and electron- ics required to monitor and control a single door, both entry and exit readers; all necessary support for request to exit devices, automatic door openers, and locking mechanisms. All access decisions shall be made by the CRC. Decisions mode by a centralized controller shall not be considered as equal. Each CRC shall maintain all schedules and holiday schedules for up to <8,000><36,000> cardholders. Upon loss of communication with the security/access control module, the CRC default mode shall provide 100% functionality utilizing all schedules and holiday data stored in its memory, and shall not grant access solely by matching facility codes. Each controller shall retain <5,000><20,000> history events in its memory. History events shall be uploaded to the access control database program under manual and/or automatic control. The CRC shall be capable of connecting to any credential reader that uses the standard Wiegand output protocol format, and shall support PlN# inputthrough a keypad (using 8-bit Dorado format) that is integral to the reader. It shall be possible to program a PIN schedule such that a PIN number is only required at specific times leg. weekends and evenings) to gain access and <is><is not> required during regular business hours. The controller shall provide two configurable supervised input circuits for use as request to exit devices, security inputs, or manual "buzz in" control. The controller shall provide a set of form "C" relay contacts to activate an automatic door opener when a valid card with the handicapped option enabled is presented to the reader. Other relay functions shall be programmable The CRC shall be housed in an attractive enclosure suitable for surface ounting near the door without detracting from interior aesthetics. ower for the CRC shall be <16VAC provided by a local class 2 plug-in transformer> <24 VDC supplied by the integrated network> The controller shall be equipped with a standby battery and integral charger, to minimize the effects of a loss of power. The battery shall be capable of operating a lock strike for up to four hours. The controller shall provide 12 VDC © ½ amp to operate the door locking mechanism. The lock control voltage shall be configurable as either energize to access or de-energize to access. As a multi-function component of a truly integrated system, the card reader controller shall be listed according to Underwriters Laboratory Standards: <UL-294 Access Control System Units, UL-864 Control Units forFire-Protective Signaling Systems. and UL-1610 Central-Station Burglar-Alarm Units><ULC-S527, UL-294, ULC-5301, ULC-S304>. Controllers not having all of the specified agency listings will not be considered as equal. The card reader controller shall be an GE Security model <CRC (8,000 cardholder)> CRCXM (36,000cordholder)>. ACDB-KE Applications The Card Reader Controller (CRC) shall provide the power and electron- ics required to monitor and control a single door, both entry and exit readers; all necessary support for request to exit devices, automatic door openers, and locking mechanisms. All access decisions shall be made by the CRC. Each CRC shall maintain all schedules and holiday schedules for up to 8,000 cardholders. The CRC shall be capable of connecting to any credential reader that uses the standard Wiegand output protocol format, and shall support PIN# input through a keypad (using 8-bit Dorado format) that is integral to the reader. It shall be possible to program a PIN schedule such that a PIN number is only required at specific times leg. weekends and evenings) to gain access and <is>ds not> required during regular business hours. The controller shall provide two configurable supervised input circuits for use as request to exit devices, security inputs, or manual "buzz in" control. The controller shall provide a set of form "C" relay contacts to activate an automatic door opener when a valid card with the handicapped option enabled is presented to the reader. Other functions shall be programmable The CRC shall be housed in an attractive enclosure suitable for surface mounting nearthe door without detracting from interior aesthetics. Power for the CRC shall be <16VAC provided by a local class 2 plug-in transformer> <24 VDC supplied by the listed power supply> The controller shall be equipped with a standby battery and integral charger, to minimize the effects of a loss of power. The battery shall be capable of operating a lock strike for up to four hours. The controller shall provide 12 VDC © ½ amp to operate the door locking mechanism. The lock control voltage shall be configurable as either energize to access or de-energize to access. - The card reader controller shall bean E Security model CRC. Ordering Information Catalog Number Description Shipping WT. lb (kg) CRC. Card Access Controller w/memory for 8,000 cardholders 1.5(0.68) CRCXM - Card Access Controller w/memory for 36.000 cardholders 1.5(0.68) CRCSND CRC Sounder Module 0.25 (0.11) 12V1A2 12V @1.2AH Standby Battery - 1.75(0.79) CRCXF Class 2, 120 Vac lnput/16 Vac Output. Plug in Transformer 40VA 2.0 (0.91) CRCRL Access Control Accessory Relay 12 Vdc 34mA coil. N/O contact, rated at 2 amps @ 30 Vdc .6PF, 2 amps @ 120/250 Vac .6PF. 0.25(0.11) www.gesecurity.com It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact GE Security. © 2004 GE Security Printed in U.S.A Page 6 of 6 Uteroture Sheet #85001-0526 Issue 5 EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC. SARASOTA FL: 941-7394300 FAX 941-753-1806 CRC and CRCXM CHESHIRE, CT 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075 OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258 Card Reader Controller INTERNATIONAL, CANADA 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9563 - 0 Product description - --- ----.--- - E I The Card Reader Controller (CRC) module performs access control processing. Each CRC stores a complete database and can grant or deny entry without external communication. If access is granted, the CRC applies or removes power for the door strike or maglock. The CRC is also capable of unlocking the connected door by activating a manual push button. Each CRC can store 8,000 (CRC) or 36,000 (CRCXM) users for any door and can save 5,000 (CRC) or 20,000 (CRCXM) events in a history log. The CRC supports two readers, one strike, and one door opener. The CRC can connect two input devices such as rquest-to-exit detectors or door contacts. CRCs continue to process access events even if there is a loss of communications or power. An internal 1.2 An sealed lead acid battery (purchased separately) provides up to 4 hours of local standby power. The CRC includes a system-controllable Form C relay that can be used for fire applications. Notes For more application and installation information, refer to the EST3 Installation and Service Manual, (P/N 270380). Specifications Dimensions Width: 8.0 in (20.5 cm) Height: 4.75 in (12.0 cm) Depth: 2.5 in (6.4 cm) Cover removal clearance: —1 in on either side Housing: White 94-VO thermoplastic Capacities CRC CRCXM Card holders: 8,000 36,000 Schedules [1]: 1,200 1,200 Holidays [11: 1,200 1,200 Access levels [1]: 1,200 1,200 History records: 5,000 20,000 - [1] Maximum capacity is 255 per company. Device support (inputs and outputs) Readers: 2 - Strikes or maglocks: 1 (This product is compatible with UL/ULC listed 12 Vdc strikes and maglocks.) Door opener 1 (Form C dry contact) Input devices: 2 Compatible electrical boxes North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 2-gang box Standard 4 in square x 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep box European 100 mm square box Wire size: 14 to 22 AWG (1.5 to 0.25 sq mm) Power Voltage range: 19 to 27 Vdc Input 24 Vdc or 16.5 Vac, 40 VA transformer (P/N CRCXF, not included) Reader output: 12 Vdc at 0.5 A Lock output: 12 Vdc at 0.5 A (see wiring note 5 below) Battery: 12 Vdc, 1.2Ah sealed lead acid (P/N 12V1 A2, not included) Current using 24 V riser Standby: 940 mA max. Active: 950 mA max. Current using CRCXF (Class II transformer) Standby: 135 mA at 120 Vac Active: 135 mA at 120 Vac Commandable Form C relay: 28 Vac/dc at 2 A (power-limited and resistive load only) Loop 1 and 2:12 Vdc, 0.5 mA Maximum cable distance to reader See reader documentation Communication: Security Access Control (SAC) bus (RS-485) SAC bus wiring Type: unshielded, twisted pair, > 6 twists per foot Maximum bus length: 4,000 ft (1,220 m) @ 25 pF/ft Maximum total capacitance: 0.1 pF Maximum total resistance: 52 ci Maximum voltage: 10 Vdc Maximum current: 250 mA Surge protector (for nonintegrated CRC installation): Ditek model number DTK-2LVLP-D Operating environment Temperature: 32 to 120 F (0 to 49 °C) Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing Installation instructions You'll need the LRM removal tool (P/N 210415) to remove the cover, a small screwdriver for terminal screws, and a standard screwdriver to mount the back plate to the electrical box. Note: Leave about 1 inch of clearance at either side of the CRC to insert the LRM removal tool when removing the cover. Surface mount, 4 in sr box, or European box PC board snap [-2-gang electrical box I PC board snap CRC backplate Battery I I 11 compartment I1 FER llh 0 0 fj Veicro strap attachment PC board attachment slots Installation Sheet 23MAR04 P/N 387625 REV: 3.0 CRC and CRCXM - Card Reader Controller 1/10 Reader wire connections to CRC terminals Reader manufacturer 10 Reader power [7] 11 Reader GND 12 Data 0 [1] [71 13 Data I [1 ][71 14 RED LED 15 GREEN 16 Sounder LED -[2] HID [3] Red Black Green White Brown Orange Yellow- Motorola Indala Red Black Green White Brown - -Blue. Dorado Red Black Green White Brown -- YëlIöT Sensor Eng. Red Black Green White Violet Bron- :BlüeL: Ken Red Black Green White Brown Orange BIue Radio Key - Red Black Green White Brown - Orange TET BtueT TEE Essex Red Black Green White - Brown- Mercury MR-10 Red Black Green White — Brown Orange 23MAR04 Installation Sheet CRC and CRCXM - Card Reader Controller PIN 387625 REV: 3.0 2/10 Attach the Velcro straps to the battery compartment. Install the battery in the battery compartment. Mount the battery insulator (provided) over the battery. Make sure the battery leads are covered and the battery wires are located to the left side of the battery. Secure the battery and insulator using the Velcro straps. Connect all wiring. Attach the cover with a right-to-left or left-to-right motion. This will properly engage the tamper switch. To install the CRC: 1. Remove the cover. S 2. Remove the PC board from the backplate using the snaps at the top of the backplate. Caution: Observe static-sensitive handling procedures. Determine the mounting location. Remember to leave clearance for cover removal. Mount the CRC backplate to a compatible electrical box. Install the PC board to the backplate. Position the board in the slots at the bottom of the backplate, then snap it into place with the snaps at the top of the backplate. Wiring diagram - _ - Z ZI Ia. cD - 0 Z l a LU a -'I iw zll Cb l I— o OZ0 _ I' 5 L 0 >>>la al I M ca lala w I- l '-' Cl) 0<) CL CL CL TB-1 IO5 i9 + ®®®®®®®$ID®® 010 ®®®®®®®® 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 16.5 Vac lNj{ 16.5 Vac lNU1] TB-2 Dry contact connections From strike/maglock/ access relay [41 To next CRC or other device L — From power supply (91 From AC/Load terminals - on plug-in transformer (CRCXF) (101 Note: The ground terminal on the transformer is not used. Red (+) Black To battery Security Access Control Bus I See Application wiring diagram From control panel, RS-485 converter, Netcom is, or previous device [121 To next device ori20QEOL if this is the last device on ( Class B or back to 3-SAC I I I module if Class A. [13] Tamper switch. Engaged when the cover is installed and activated when the cover is removed. Wiring diagram notes If used as an inside reader, connect the green wire to TB 1-13 and the white wire to TB 1-12. Connect the readers sounder wire only when the CRCSND is not used and control of the reader's sounder is required. [31 Program for dual-LED control. [4] Use a 4.7 KU, 1/4 watt resistor if no strike is being used to maintain supervision. When maglock or door strike voltage or current is outside CRC(XM) operational parameters, use an accesory relay (catalog number CRCRL) and a listed external power supply to power the lock. Refer to the accessory relay's installation sheet (P/N 3100294) for more information. When wiring between CRCs goes outside a building, the specified surge protector is required for the wires leaving the building and for the wires entering another building. The surge protector adds 8 ohms of resistance to the line it is connected to. If you are not connecting a reader, you must use two 47 KU, 1/4W resistors, one between TB1-10 and TB1-12, and another between TB1-10 and TB 1-13. For connection to UJJULC listed devices. WARNING: -24 V in must be connected to the PS/MON -24 V even if the CRCXF is used. WARNING: The CRCXF with a battery provides 30 minutes of access and four hours of security standby power. The CRCXF cannot be used in a CRC designed for the following applications: fire alarm, Local mercantile Grade A premises, Central station Grade A, B, or C, Proprietary Grade A or AA, or Holdup alarm. 11. When using a CRC as a muster station, the reader must be wired as an outside reader. [121 The SAC bus must originate from a 3-SAC module in a control panel, or from an RS-485 converter or a NETCOM-1 S Device Server on a PC running the ACDB-KE software. [13] CRCs can only be wired as class A when used with a 3-SAC module from a control panel. Jumper setup Intermittent per Continuous power (using strike) (using maglock or continuously powered strike) JP1 () © © Output source JP2 ® © ©I Input source AC power DC per (from transformer) (from panel) Wire routing All connections, except the battery leads, are power limited. Terminals TB1-1-4 and 17-23 are supervised. Battery leads must be routed under the provided insulator, and must be a minimum of 1/4 inch from any other wiring including TB2 connections or you must use FPL, FPLR, or FPLP wiring. Route 16.5 Vac (TB2-1 and 2) and +24 V in/out (TB 1-1 and 2) out of the CRC. Leave no excess wire in the CRC. This ensures proper power limited spacing. Power-limited wrnng COD OMOD GO= Nonpower-limited wiring Application wiring diagrams The CRC can be wired and powered in several ways. Each method requires specific wiring to allow the CRCs to operate properly. The figures on the following pages illustrate the required components and wiring for common applications. Installation Sheet 23MAR04 P/N 387625 REV: 3.0 CRC and CRCXM - Card Reader Controller 3110 f 0 Control Panel [4] 24 Vdc 24 Vdc - Listed power supply Circuit common (31 - To next CRC F-1--1,.III.III ,t..'s. .,,t- II .,'IIIl..11tI'\.. ID1i®©I I©cIDQD—t.1©®®®I 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 LCR TB-i TB-i 2 IT132 CRC! lll2 CRCI 2 2 CRCXM 18-2 CRCXM [1124 Vdc power supply from PPS/M [3] The -24 Vdc wire acts as the circuit common when using an additional power supply [21 SAC bus from 3-SAC [4] Power supply must have ground fault detection circuits disabled CRCs wired to an integrated control panel with an additional remote power supply Circuit Optional Control Panel common 131 J• +24 Vdc • 7-1 - 4)__t4]__().. -- — — — — i r u i To next - II III ill1 CRC Ii iI I I I I I i I I I I '1S 'i I I I I I __i IjDID©D 11©® ®©®[IIMD©CIDI 34l71819'1 1''4 17 ____ TB-i 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 ir TB-1 I CR 12] CRC/ M CRC! ICRC CRCXM 18-2 CRCXM [1] 24 Vdc power supply from PPS/M I -- [2] SAC bus from 3-SAC [3) The -24 Vdc wire acts as the circuit common when using an additional AC power supply transformer [4] We recommended that you connect the +24 Vdc wire to all CRCs CRCs wired to an integrated control panel with an AC transformer (11 24Vdc+ 24VdC-M Listed Ciitcoml - power supply I Surge protector ACOB-KE To next CRC J. ri:ifl 1i:iI - • 1234 17 18 19 20 1234 17181920 Convwe IF CRC/ 2 - - - 18-2 CRCXM 18-2 CRCXN ------(I] Power-supply may have- ground-fautt-detection disabled- - Connect the circuit common to the signal ground of the convetterind the -24 Vdc terñiinai of the listed power supply through the surge protector SAC bus, wiring as specified CRCs wired to the ACDB-KE through a converter and powered from a remote power supply P/N 387625 REV: 3.0 23MAR04 Irstallation Sheet 4/10 CRC and CRCXM - Card Reader Controller Circuit common 111 Surge SAC bus (21 ACOB-KE Circuit common rotecto RS-232 I To next CRC L hID[I©© 34 171819201 I 234 17 18 19 20 Converter - -1iiE F_7 CRC1 TB-1l TB- rlI2 I [2 I J11F I CRC/ [11 Connect the circuit common to the I signal ground of the converter and lU11 (1I) I I frIJ ól the -24 Vdc terminal of the CRC I c. I I I through the surge protector Z << AC I AC [2( SAC bus, wiring as specified I transformer I I transformer CRCs wired to the ACDB-KE through a converter and powered from AC transformers BA BA BT 0 0 .41 BA BT tBA 0 Basic Security N/C with Tamper N/O with Tamper - EOL resistors are 47 K CRC relay terminals Compatibility lists Table 1: Compatible card readers Manufacturer Model number Description Dorado Systems 200-B (3110-2001) Mullion proximity card reader Dorado Systems 200-G (3110-2000) Mullion proximity card reader Dorado Systems 220-B (3310-2201) Mullion proximity/magnetic stripe card reader Dorado Systems 220-W (3310-2200) Mullion proximity/magnetic stripe card reader Dorado Systems 250-B (3110-2501) Wall mount proximity card reader Dorado Systems 250-W (3110-2500) Wall mount proximity card reader Dorado Systems 251-B (3110-2511) Wall mount proximity keypad card reader Dorado Systems 251-W (3110-2510) Wall mount proximity keypad card reader Dorado Systems 278 (3110-2781) Ruggedized proximity/magnetic stripe/keypad card reader Essex Electronics KTP-102-Ll Thinline 2 x 6 Keypad, 26-bit Wiegand, Black Lexan Overlay, Illuminated, Surface or Mullion Mount, 5 or 12V Essex Electronics KTP-1 03-SN 3 x 4 Keypad, 26-bit Wiegand, Stainless Steel Bezel, Non- Illuminated, Surface or Flush Mount, 5 or 12V HID Corporation 5355A8K0009 ProxPro1' proximity card reader with Wiegand output -- —HID-Corporation 5355AG00 ProxProTm proximity card reader with Wiegand output HID Corporation 5355AGK0009 ProxPro Tm proximity card reader with Wiegand output HID Corporation 5355ABK0009 ProxPro proximity card reader with Wiegand output HID Corporation 5365C8P02 MiniProxTm proximity card reader with Wiegand output Installation Sheet 23MAR04 P/N 387625 REV: 3.0 CRC and CRCXM - Card Reader Controller 5/10 S Table 4: Length of SAC bus using 14 AWG wire Doors Powered by 70 100 150 200 1 CRCXF Load current (mA) 250 300 350 400 450 550 600 1 650 1 4000 4000 4000 4000 3000 2400 2000 1750 1500 1360 1200 1100 1000 940 2 4000 4000 4000 2700 2000 1600 1360 1160 1000 900 800 740 680 620 3 4000 4000 3000 2040 1500 1200 1020 870 750 660 600 555 510 471 4 4000 3480 2400 1600 1200 960 800 700 600 544 480 436 400 376 5 4000 2900 2000 1365 1000 800 675 575 500 455 405 365 335 315 6 4000 2460 1710 1140 870 690 582 492 438 390 348 312 X X 7 4000 2170 1505 1015 756 602 511 434 378 336 301 X X X 8 4000 1920 1360 904 680 544 448 384 336 X X X X X 9 4000 1710 1215 810 612 477 405 351 X X X X X X 10 4000 1550 1100 740 550 440 370 310 X X X X X X 11 4000 1430 1012 682 1 506 407 341 X X X X X X X 12 4000 1344 936 624 468 372 X X X X X X X X 13 4000 1248 858 585 429 351 X X X X X X X X 14 4000 1162 812 532 406 322 X X X X X X X X 15 4000 1095750 510 375 X X X X X X X X X 16 4000 1024 720 480 352 X X X X X X X X X 17 4000 969 680 442 340 X X X X X X X X X 18 4000 918 630 414 X X X X X X X X X X 19 4000 874 608 399 X X X X X X X X X X 20 4000 820 580 380 X X X X X X X X X X 21 4000 X X X X X X X X X X X X X Notes: All distance measurements are given in feet. X means that the 3-PPS/M will not support these devices at this distance. P/N 387625 REV: 3.0 23MAR04 Installation Sheet 10/10 CRC and CRCXM - Card Reader Controller Table 3: Length of SAC bus using 16 AWG wire Doors Powered by 70 1-100, 150 1 200 1 CRCXF Load current (mA) 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 1 650 1 4000 4000 4000 2650 2000 1600 1300 1140 1000 885 800 720 665 616 2 4000 3800 2660 1776 1300 1060 880 760 666 594 532 484 444 410 3 4000 2850 1950 1320 990 780 660 570 498 444 399 363 333 306 4 4000 2240 1600 1040 800 624 520 452 400 355 320 288 266 244 5 4000 1875 1350 885 650 525 435 375 333 296 266 242 222 205 6 4000 1620 1140 756 558 450 378 324 286 254 228 207 190 X 7 4000 1400 980 665 497 392 329 285 250 222 199 X X X 8 4000 1240 880 584 440 352 288 253 222 197 X X X X 9 4000 1125 810 522 396 315 261 228 200 X X X X X 10 4000 1030 730 480 360 290 240 207 X X X X X X 11 4000 946 660 440 330 264 220 X X X X X X X 12 4000 876 600 408 300 240 X X X X X X X X 13 4000 806 559 377 273 X X X X X X X X X 14 4000 756 518 350 X X X X X X X X X X 15 4000 705 495 330 X X X X X X X X X X 16 4000 672 464 304 X X X X X X X X X X 17 4000 629442 X X X X X X X X X X X 18 4000 576 414 X X X X X X X X X X X 19 4000 570 399 X X X X X X X X X X X 20 4000 540 380 X X X X X X X X X X X 21 4000 X X X X X X X X X X X X X Notes: All distance measurements are given in feet. X means that the 3-PPS/lvl Will not support these devices at this distance. Installation Sheet 23MAR04 F/N 387625 REV: 3.0 CRC and CRCXM - Card Reader Controller 9/10 readers, strikes, and maglocks can be load shed to reduce battery requirements. Calculate the battery capacity (BC) as follows; • BC(C3xDCxSH)/1000 Calculate the active load by totaling total current (C2). Calculate the battery size by totaling battery capacity (BC). Calculate the Derated battery size as follows. Derated battery size = Battery size x 1.2 Add the Active load figure to the corresponding totals calculated for the remainder of the system. If the Active load is greater than the available panel supply capacity, you must add an additional power supply. Use the system-wide Derated battery size to determine the battery required for the panel. Providing adequate voltage for devices To determine whether each CRC and KPDISP will have adequate input voltage, the voltage drops along the SAC bus can be estimated or calculated. Estimated voltage drop To estimate the voltage drop use Table 3 and Table 4, which show the maximum length of a SAC bus for a given number of devices and a total load current. (One table is for 16 AWG wire, the other for 14 AWG wire.) (The tables are based on a 32 V drop.) These tables were calculated based on even spacing between doors and an equal load at each door. To check for adequate device voltage: Determine the total active current for a typical door. To do this, add the active current of the CRC, the active current of the door lock, the active current of the card reader, and the active current of the sounder (if used). Determine the number of doors you need to secure. In Table 3, find the intersection of the number of doors and the load current you determined in steps 1 and 2. This is the maximum length (in feet) of the SAC bus using 16 AWG wire. If the distance from the control panel to the last device on the SAC bus is less than this distance, no further calculations are needed. If the distance to the last device in you installation is greater than this distance, repeat steps 1 through 4 using Table 4. If changing the gauge of the wire does not result in a sufficient length for a single SAC, you will need to design the system with an additional power source, then repeat the steps. This power source may be an additional connection to the same or another 3-PPSIM located in the same cabinet as the 3-SAC that connects these devices, another fire rated power supply with ground isolation, or a CRCXF. f P/N 387625 REV; 3.0 23MAR04 8110 Installation Sheet CRC and CRCXM - Card Reader Controller Table 2: Compatible access cards Manufacturer Model Number Description Motorola ASK-116 Proximity key tag HID Corporation PK-1346 Proximity Key Fob Proximity key fob with HID logo for use with EST or HID proximity card readers LED control cards Motorola 07260-001 Single and dual line LED control option card Ken Systems 05528-702 LED mode control card [1] A separately ordered LAM-1 Laminator is required for laminating a photo to the access card. Use a Polaroid 103 or I04 Camera for taking the photo. System power calculations Use Form A to determine the load created by SAC bus devices. Follow the instructions given below. Add this load to the load created by fire alarm devices to determine the total load for the panel power supply. Form A: SAC active and standby currents If the load exceeds the panel power supply capacity, you need an additional power supply for the SAC bus devices. Note that the SAC current load consists of the current drawn by the CRC or KPDISP devices plus any readers, strikes, and maglocks. Device Quantity (Q) Current draw @ 12 Vdc (mA) (Cl) Total current @ 24 Vdc (mA) (C2) Standby current (mA) (C3) Duty cycle (%) (DC) Standby hours (SH) Battery capacity (Ah) (BC) Strike Maglock Reader CRC [11 60 250 0 0 0 0 CRCSND 8 KPDISP 100 Active load Battery size Derated battery size [1] Two currents are given for the CRC. The first is normal operating current. The second is the current drawn when the battery is being charged. The charging current should be included in the Total current calculation, but excluded from the Battery size calculation, as indicated by the zeros. To determine the need for additional power (Form A): _j Fill ift the quantity (Q) of each device. 2. Fill in the rated current draw at 12Vdc (mA) (Cl) for each - typ4 of device used. 3—Enter—or calculate the total current (mA) at 24 Vdc (C2) —using:- Locks-=--(Q. x G1 x0.98)-5 Card readers with 12V current draw equaling 99 mA or LQC1 ctLiL_ --Card readers with 12V current draw over 99mA= (Q x C1 x 0.98) - 55 . CRC, CRCSND, KPDISP = a x Cl 4. Calculate the standby current (mA) (C3) as follows. Locks, readers, and CRCSNDs = (C3 = C2) CRCs = (C3 = Q x 50) KPDISPs = (C3 = a x 35) Fill in the duty cycle (as a percentage). Example: A duty cycle of 30 seconds in every 5 minutes (300 seconds) is a 10% duty cycle. Fill in the standby hours - Standby hours are the number of hoLrs after which lock and reader loads should be shed when operating on battery power. Note that load shedding of locks and readers requires 3-SDU programming. When used for fire alarm applications, CRCs and KPDlSPs require at least 24 hours of standby power, but Installation Sheet 23MAR04 P/N 387625 REV: 3.0 CRC and CRCXM - Card Reader Controller 7/10 Table 1: Compatible card readers Manufacturer Model number Description HID Corporation 5365E6P02 MiniProxTm proximity card reader with Wiegand output HID Corporation 5375NT MaxiProxTm extended range card reader HID Corporation 5395CG100 ThinLine II proximity card reader with Wiegand output HID Corporation 6005ABSOO ProxPoinP' proximity card reader with Wiegand output HID Corporation 6005AKS00 ProxPointTm proximity card reader with Wiegand output HID Corporation 6005AWSOO ProxPointTM proximity card reader with Wiegand output HID Corporation 6005B8800 ProxPointTm proximity card reader with Wiegand output HID Corporation 6005BWSOO ProxPointTm proximity card reader with Wiegand output HID Corporation 6005BKSOO ProxPointTm proximity card reader with Wiegand output HID Corporation 6030AGROO ProxPro Plus proximity card reader HID Corporation 6030AGSOO ProxPro PlusTM proximity card reader KeriSystems P-300BL Cascade proximity card reader KeriSystems P-300W Cascade proximity card reader KeriSystems P-500BL Alps proximity card reader KeriSystems P-500W Alps proximity card reader Mercury Security MR-10 Mag Stripe Reader, Format Selectable (inc. 26-bit Wiegand), Die Cast Aluminum, 12V Motorola ARK-501+ PinProxTm proximity card reader with keypad Motorola ASR-603 SecureProxTm I proximity card reader Motorola ASR-605 SecureProxTIA II proximity card reader Position Technology CR-R880 Posi-Prox Proximity Card Reader Table 2: Compatible access cards Manufacturer Model Number Description Wiegand access cards HID Corporation HID Sensorcard Wiegand Card Wiegand card with HID logo HID Corporation HID Photold Wiegand Card with A Wiegand card with HID logo that has space for including a Photo [1] person's photo. Magnetic stripe access cards HID Corporation 1336 DuoProx II Multiple Technology Proximity Card Proximity access cards EST PC-1326 Proximity access control card EST PC-1 386 ISO proximity access control card with unique EST bit format and EST logo on back - EST PC-13868 ISO proximity access control card with unique EST bit format and no logo on front or back EST EST-PC Construction Card. Proximity access control card with EST logo and unique construction code bit format .EST - PK-1346 Proximity Key Fob with unique EST format Motorola AVC-131 Multi-tech proximity access control card Motorola APC-161 [1] Multi-tech photo ID proximity access control card PIN 387625 REV: 3.0 23MAR04 Installation Sheet 6/10 CRC and CRCXM - Card Reader Controller EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Part of GE Security SECURITY/ACCESS CONTROL I Proximity Card Reader Models: CR-5395, C-5395x Features Aesthetically pleasing design Easy to change colors fl lndoor/outdoorrated Audible and visual indicators Durable-vandal resistant Low maintenance ' Description The CR-5395 is an aesthetically pleasing proximity card reader that is available with a variety of different color covers. Cards are read when they are held in the vicinity of the reader. The CR-5395 uses proximity technology that eliminates the need for reader adjustments required by swipe-type readers. The CR-5395 is rated for both indoor and outdoor applications and mounts on a one-gang electrical box. The rugged sealed polycarbonate construction provides a high degree of vandal resistance as well as protection from harsh environments. Application The CR-5395 is suitable for indoor and outdoor applications when an aesthetically pleasing proximity card reader is desired. Ordering Information Catalog Number Description Shipping Wt lb (kg) CR6395. Proximity Card Reader, Charcoal Gray 0.5 (0.23) C-5395G Gray Cover for CR-5395 0.25(0.11) C-5395B Beige Cover for CR-5395 &.95BL- 53 Black Cover for CR-5395 C-5395W White Cover for CR-5395 0 imagination at work Specifications Dimensions (HWD) 4.7" x 3.00"x 0.68" (11.9cm x 7.6cm x 1.7cm) Card Read Range PC-1326 Up to 5.5"'(14cm) PC-1386 Up to 5" (12.5cm) PK-1346 Upto2"(5cm) Transmit Frequency 125 kHz Operating Voltage 5-16 Vdc Current Draw 50rnAAverage Distance from Controller Up to 500' (150m) from Card Reader Controller Construction Sealed weatherized - polycarborate enclosure Approvals UL-294 FCC part 15, United States DTI (MPT 1337), United Kingdom CE Mark approved - Operating Environment -22" to 150°F (-30° to 65°C) 5%toi 95% relatve humidity, non-condensing - - www.gesecurtty.com 8985 TOWN CENTER PARKWAY, BRADENTON, FL 34202 PHONE: 888-378.2329 • FAX: 866-503-3996 CANADA SALES- OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES. (0011905-270-1711; FAX (001)90S-270-95S3 Literature Sheet #85001-0522 Issue Not to be used for irtstollotion purposes. Page 1 of 2 f P4 NOT TO BE USED FOR INS TALLAHONI PURPOSLS. sta tlation Back View 7/64' (28cm) oiHH 11 ,1 DOO.iv') liii 3.32" (8.43cm) 318' ( .95cm) to 1 (2.54cm) E€fl VOCW diameter hole , 4.66' (11.84cm) FCC 653X 30 62T1 - Viring Engineering Specification The access control card reader shall be of the proximity type, requiring only that the access control card be held approximately 1.5' (4cm) from the reader for the card to be read. Insertion of or swiping of the card through the reader is not acceptable. The encoded data from the access card and/or transponder shall be sent to the card reader controller (CRC) for processing. The card reader shall provide both audible and visual indication of a properly read cord. When connected to the access controller the LED shall provide different flash rates when a visitor escort or a second cardholder is required for access. The cord reader output shall utilize the standard Wiegond output protocol and feature a re-present mode to prevent multiple reads from a single card presentation. The reader housing shall be constructed of a polycarbonate material, suitable for mounting on a single gang electrical box, color and location shall be as shown on the plans. The card reader shall be fully weatherized, and shall have on operating temperature of -22° to 150°F 1-30° to 65°Cl, and shall have an operating range of 5 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing. The card reader shall be UL listed per UL 294 as an access control system unit accessory, and meet the appropriate FCC and DTI certifica- lions. The aesthetically coordinated access control cord reader shall bean GE Security model CR-5395 1.68 IS Data0l I Data Shield I Green I Red I I Card +DC I Ground I Beeper Hold Data Clock I Ground LED LED j I Present Red Black Green White Drain j Orange Brown I Yellow I Blue* j Violet* * not used with CRCIXMI www.gesecuritg.com It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact GE Secuntg. Panted in U-SA Literature Sheet #85001-0522 Issue 1 C2001GESecurity Page 2 of 2 S EDWARD. SYSTEMS TECAROLOGY Part ofGE IIutuilk! ACCESSORIES -: Quic J reShieId: F EST3: Electromagnetic Door Holders Floor and wall mounted styles ggv Low power consumption -1 AC/DC models Completely silent operation 't / 25 Lbf(111N) nominal hdlding force 131 Adjustable, swivel contact plate Description GE Security Electromagnetic Door Holders are ruggedly constructed and attractively designed. The housing is finished with an aluminum color, durable baked polyester powder paint. The floor or wall section houses the electromagnet while the contact plate attaches to the door. The contact plate has a shock absorbing nylon (swivel) ball which allows the plate to adjust to any door angle. Floor units are available in single- door or double-door (back to back) versions. Wall units are available in flush or surface mounted versions. GE Security door releases should be installed wherever doors may be effectively used to confine smoke and fire, or where the release of a self- closing door from a remote location is desirable for other reasons. Fail-safe operation is an inherent feature of GE Security door holder- releases. If power fails, doors are released automatically but may be opened or closed manually at any time. All units are free of moving parts, are self-contained and require no maintenance. These door holder-releases have a holding force of approximately 15 to 25 Lbf (66 to 111N). The device holds a door open while energized. When de-energized by a relay controlled by the fire alarm system or other switch, the door is released to a closed position, checking the spread of smoke and flames. Electromagnetic door holders should be used and installed in accordance with local Building Codes and Stand- ards. 0 imagination at Work Basic Models Floor Mounted: The electromagnet portion consists of a floor plate and a floor housing which when installed with gaskets provided, form a weatherproof electrical junction box. Incoming conduitconnects directly into floor plate. Floor mounted units are available with one (Cat. No. 1501) or two (Cat. No. 15021 magnet faces for holding a single door or two doors back to back. Wall Mounted: Wall mounted models are available in flush, semi-flush and surface mounting configurations. Flush and semi-flush models are designed for concealed wiring applications and mount on standard single gang (2 x 4 inch) outlet boxes. Surface mounted models mount on a surface adaptor housing (junction box), which is provided. Specifications Model - - SWIi Volts Amps 1501-AQN5 Floor Mounted (SinglDdr) 24 Vac 60 Hz 24Vdc -120 Vac 60 Hz .015 1502-AQN5 . Floor. Motinted- 1504-AQN5 - iT1(tnjCitcbIPlate) FlustiWail Mounted 1505-AQN5 FItistfWàtfMoünted -- (Short Catch- Plate) 1508-AQN5 ' Surface:WaltMounted 1509-AQNS Completely Flush Wall Mounted *1502AQN5 is a double unit which draws .015 per side www.gesecurity.com 8985 TOWN CENTER PARKWAY, BRADENTON, FL 34202 PHONE: 883-378-2329 • FAX: 866-503-3996 CANADA SALES:OWEN SOUND, ON 519-376-2430; FAX 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL SALES: (001) 905-270-1711; FAX (001(905-270-9553 Literature Sheet #85001-0421 Issue 6.1 Not to be used for installation purposes. Page 1 of 2 1-5/8" 1-5/8" (41mm) (41mm) __ 4-7/8" ____ fl124mm) (44mrn)fj 1502-AQN5 Floor Mounted (Double Door) .._2.7116 , (62mmT______ 2-3/4' (70mm) . 1-5/8' (41mm) 0 fl (1m)0 IT Wall Mounted 1508-AQN5 Surface (41mm) •.--' —: en si ons 13116" 2-314" l21 , r121 mm) "(70mm) 5/8 (67mm) 0)1 (114mm) j 0 1504-AQN5 Flush Wall Mounted (Long Catch Plate) 13/16" 2-3/4' 1-5/8' f fl2imm)70mn fl mm) Mo 1505-AQN5 Flush Wall Mounted (Short Catch Plate) 1-5/8' 4-1/2" , (114mm) (41 mm) 4-13/16" Th22mm 1-T FT 1501-AQN5 Floor Mounted (Single Door) Catch Plate Extensions Only the extension rods are included. The end pieces are included with the doorholders or can be ordered separately. 8" max. I 6.37' min. .2 mm max.16 1. 8 mm min. 1500-7 .1 12 max. / 8.37" min. 04. . 8rnrnmax 1212. 6 1500-12 2.34 I(59.5m " -(38 mm) mm) 1.68' mm) 1500-1 1500-2 71_____ El 3. LI!!II 4.125" 4.25" [1 2mm) (104. mm)'\1, (117.5 mmy' f"\ Ir. H 1500-1 1500-2 1500-1 1500-2 7/32' 2-3/4'-.. CC ,/ r(6mrn) 7Omm) (114mm) 0 l Ordering Information Model No. Description Ship. Wt. lb (kg) 1501-AQN5 Floor Mounted (Single Door) 5.4(2.45) 1502-AQN5 Floor Mounted (Double Door) 5.0 (2.27) 1504-AQN5 Flush Wall Mounted (Long Catch Plate) 2,0 (0.91) 1505-AQN5 Flush Wall Mounted (Short Catch Plate) 2.0 (0.91) 1508-AQN5 Surface Wall Mounted 3.0 (1.36) 1509-AQN5 Completely Flush Wall Mounted 2.0 (0.91) Accessories 1500-1 Catch plate extension assembly, 1.5' 0.25 (0.11) 1500-2 Catch plate extension assembly, 2.5' 0.25 (0.11) 1500-7 Catch plate extension assembly (5.25 to 7.5 inches) 0.5(0.23) 1500- 12 Catch plate extension assembly (7.5 to 12 inches) 1.0(0.45) - Replacement armature - short (for use with 1501, 1502, 1505, 1508 and 1509 door holders) 0.25 (0.11) CS2595-5 LCS:2759:8-~7 Replacement armature - long 11) (for use with 1504 door holder) .25 (0 - ICAUTlON; These Cro or Holder units will not ape rate without electrical power. 1509-AQN5 Completely Flush Wall Mounted www.gesecurity.com It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact GE Security. 41 2005 GE Security Printed in U.S.A. Page 2 of 2 Literature Sheet #85001-0421 Issue 6.1 STATE FIRE MARSHAL LISTING SHEETS CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7170-1657:187 Page 1 of 2 CATEGORY: Cö?t?O1Unit (High-Rise) LISTEE: GE Security, Inc., 8985 Town Center Parkway, Bradenton, FL 34202 Contact: Jewell Micochero (941) 739-4358 FAX (941) 308-8123 DESIGN: Models EST3, EST3R, EST3-230, EST3R-230, EST200, EST200R, EST200-2 and EST-200R-2 fire alarm control units. Power limited Automatic, manual, coded, noncoded, local, auxiliary, remote station, (DACT),(reverse polarity), proprietary (multiplex), central station, waterfiow and sprinkler supervisory service. Model EST3 is also suitable for smoke control. Refer to listee's data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations. System components: 3-BPS/M, 3-BPS/M/230 Booster Power Supply 3-PPS/M, 3-PPS/M-230 Primary Power Supply 3-BBC/M, 3-BBC/M-230 Battery Booster Charger Power Supply 3-RS232 CPU RS232 Comm 3-XMEM CPU Memory Option 3-IDC8/4 Zone Card 3-CPU, 3-CPU1, 3-CPU2, 3-CPU3 Central Processing Unit 3-LCD, 3-LCDXL CPU LCD Display S 3-OPS Off Premises Signaling Module 3-LDSM LED Display Module 3-LRMF Blank LRM Filler 3-CHAS4, -CHAS-5, -CHAS-7 Module Chassis 3-CAB-5(R),-7(R),-14(R),-21(R) Module Cabinet (red) 3-TAMP, 3-TAMP5 Tamper Switch 3-RCC7(R),-RCC1 4(R),-RCC21 (R) Closet Cabinet (red) 3-PSMON Power Supply Drive Monitor 3-BPMON Power Supply Booster Monitor 3-BBCMON Battery Booster Charger Monitor 3-24G,-24R,-24Y,-12RY,-I2SY,-12SR,-I2SG LED Display 3-1 2IRY,-1 212Y,-1 2/2S2Y,-12/S1 GY LED Display 3-12/S1 RY,-18S1 G2Y,-6/351 G2Y LED Display 3-6/3S1GYR,-18S1GYR, -6/3S3L LED Display 3-CA65BR Enclosure 3-SSDC, 3-SSDC1, 3-SDDC1 Single Loop Controller Module 3-SDC, 3-SDC1 SitffreData'Card 3-ASU, 3-ASUMX/100 - Audio Source Module 3-FTCU Firefighter Phone Module 3-ASU/FT --Audio/Firefighter Module 3-ZA30, 3-ZA15 - Amplifier--- 3 R5485( 130316/130410 01) N1etworkComrnunication Card 3-R5485A, 3-R5485B, 3-R5485R Networkeornrnunkation Card 3-DSDC, 3DSDC1 - ----- Dual-Loop-Controller-Module. 3-FIB, 3-FIBA Fibr/CopperData Corn Module - 3-FIBMB Fiber- Optic- Card 08-17-05 Listing No. 7170-1657:187 Page 2 of 2 CDR-3 3-MDC, 3-MOd 3-ATPINT 3-REMICA, 3-REMICP PT1-S P11-P 3-ZA90, 3-ZA20A, 3-ZA20B 3-ZA-40A, 3-ZA40B, 3-ZA95 ATCK 3-MODCOM, 3-MOOCOMP 3-NSHM1, 3-NSHM2 3-SAC 3-ASUXM/1 00 Coded Output MóduEë Analog Addressable Communication Module ATPC Interface Module Remote Microphone System Printer - System Printer Parallel Zone Amplifiers Zone Amplifiers Attack Kit Cover for 3-RCC7R cabinet Modem communicator/pager interface Modem Communication Cards Security Access Control Module Audio and Telephone Masters RATING: EST3, EST3R, EST200, EST200-2, EST200R, EST200R-2: 120 VAC EST3-230, EST3R-230: 220 VAC INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical rating and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as fire alarm control units suitable for high-rise applications when used in conjunction with separately listed electrically and functionally compatible initiating and indicating devices. Model EST is also suitable for smoke control. Refer to listee's Installation Instructions Manual for details. These control units can generate a distinctive three-pulse Temporal Pattern Fire Alarm Evacuation Signal (for total evacuation) in accordance with NFPA 72, 1999 Edition. NOTE: . 1. For Fire Alarm Verification Feature (delay of fire alarm signal), the maximum Retard/Reset/Restart period shall not exceed 30 seconds. Formerly 7170-1591:187 and 7170-1388:212 08-17-05 This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results - and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is rot an endorsement or ..• . recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: JUNE 26, 2006 Listing Expires June 30, 2007 Authorized By: DIANE K. A REND, Senior Deputy Program Manager CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. CATEGORY LISTEE: DESIGN: 7120-1657:198 Page 1 of 1 Annunciators GE Security, Inc., 8985 Town Center Parkway, Bradenton, FL 34202 Contact: Jewell Micochero (941) 739-4358 FAX (941) 308-8123 Models 2-3ANN and 2-6ANN annunicators. Refer to listee's data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. The units are modular in construction. System components: 2- 10 2-6ANN/C 6ANNB(-S), 10ANNB(-S) 2-LCD 2-CPU 2-DLM 2-16Y 2-16R 2-16G 2-8RY 2-1 2R4Y 2-8RY2 2-1 6R8S 2-1 6Y8S Enciosure Door vv/Inner Door Back Box LCD Display Module Annunciator Motherboard Data Line Monitor 16 yellow LED Annunciator 16 red LED Annunciator 16 green LED Annunciator 8 Red/Yellow Annunciator 12 Red/4YeIlow LED Annunciator 8 Red/Yellow LED/8 Switch Annunciator 16 Red LED/8 Switch 16 Yellow LED/8 Switch INSTALLATION MARKING: APPROVAL: NOTE: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptableto the authority having jurisdiction. Listee's name, model number, electrical rating and UL label. Listed as remote annunciator for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. Formerly 7120-1591:198 and 7120-1388:223 -- YJ 'o This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff-ha reviewed thetesLresuIts and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing-is--not-an endorsement-or— recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation . ' criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: JUNE 26, 2006 Listing Expires June 30, 2007 Authorized By: DIANE K. AREND, Senior Deputy Program Manager CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7300-1657:229 Page 1 cf 1 CATEGORY: Misc. Devices/Control Unit Accessories LISTEE: GE Security, Inc., 8985 Town Center Parkway, Bradenton, FL 34202 Contact: Jewell Micochero (941) 739-4358 FAX (941) 308-8123 DESIGN: Models BPS6A, BPS1 OA, BPS6A/230, BPS1 0A1230, BPS6CAA, and BPS1 OCAA remote booster pcwer supplies. Rafer tolistee's data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. RATING: 120 V/240 V, 60 Hz, 50 Hz INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instruction, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, model number, rating, and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as remote booster power supplies for use with listee's separately listed compatible fire alarm control units to extend the notification appliance circuit. Refer to listee's Installation Instruction Manual for details. NOTE: Formerly 7300-1591:229 08-17-05 This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: JUNE 26, 2006 Listing Expires June 30, 2007 Authorized By: DIANE K. A REND, Senior Deputy Program Manager CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM S LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7272-1657:126 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: Photoelectric Smoke Detector LISTEE: GE Security, Inc., 8985 Town Center Parkway, Bradenton, FL 34202 Contact: Jewell Micochero (941) 739-4358 FAX (941) 308-8123 DESIGN: Models SIGA-PS and SIGA-PHS photoelectric smoke detectors. Model SIGA-PHS employs an integral 135"F flxed temperature heat sensci This heat sensor is a supplementary device to the smoke detector and is not approved as a required heat detector. Refer to listee's printed data sheet for additional detailed product description, installation and operational considerations. INSTALLATION: MARKING 5 APPROVAL NOTE In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Listees name, model number, electrical rating and UL label. Listed as photoelectric smoke detectors for use with listee's listed fire alarm control units and Model SIGA Series bases (CSFM Listing No. 7300-1657:120). Model SIGA-PS may be suitable for installation directly in the duct with the velocity range from 0-5000 feet/min. Model SIGA-PHS is not intended for use in lieu of a required heat detector. Formerly 7272-1591:126 and 7272-1388:186 08-15-05 This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results- and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: JUNE 263 2006 Listing Expires June 30, 2007 Authorized By: DIANE K. AREND, Senior Deputy Program Manager CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7300-1657:120 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: Misc. Devices/Control Unit Accessories LISTEE: GE Security, Inc., 8985 Town Center Parkway, Bradenton, FL 34202 Contact: Jewell Micochero (941) 739-4358 FAX (941) 308-8123 DESIGN: Detector Bases. Refer to listee's data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. Base models are as follow BASES 5963B, 5964 B/BR 6241 B-002, 6249B-001 6251, 625113-001A, -001, -002,-003,-004, 625113-100, -200, -R100, -R200 and 6251-2 Models 6251 B-aOl, -002, -003 and -004 suitable for releasing device service. P-847674-0022, -0024, -0042, -0043, -0044, -0045. -0046, -0047 SIGA-SB, -SB4, -RB, -RB4, -lB, -lB4 and —AB4 The —RB series are suitable for releasing device service. Model AB4G-SB surface mount back box for use with listee's SIGA series sourder bases. INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical rating, and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as mounting bases for use with separately listed compatible detectors and fire alarm control units. Refer to listee's Installation Instruction Manual for details. NOTE: Formerly 7300-1591:120 and 7300-1388:170 08-15-05 - - . This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results - - —and/or other data- but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: JUNE 26, 2006 Listing Expires June 30, 2007 Authorized By: DIANE K. A REND, Senior Deputy Program Manager CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM S LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7270-1657:125 Page 1 cf 1 CATEGORY: Heat Detector -- LISTEE: GE Security, Inc., 8985 Town Center Parkway, Bradenton, FL 34202 Contact: Jewell Micochero (941) 739-4358 FAX (941) 308-8123 DESIGN: Model SlGA-HFS and SIGA-HRS heat detectors. Model SIGA-HFS is a 135°F fixed temperature detector and Model SIGA-HRS is a 135°F fixed temperature and a I 5°mft rate of rise detector. Refer to listee's data sheet for detailed model descriptions and operational considerations. INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical rating and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as heat detector for use withlistee's separately listed compatible bases (CSFM S Listing No. 7300-1657:120) and fire alarm control units. NOTE: Formerly 7270-1591:125 and 7270-1388:185 08-15-05 This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or .. recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer tolistee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: JUNE 26, 2006 Listing Expires June 30, 2007 Authorized By: DIANE K. A REND, Senior Deputy Program Manager CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7150-1657:129 Page 1 o-'1 CATEGORY: Boxes/Pull Stations LISTEE: GE Security, Inc., 8985 Town Center Parkway, Bradenton, FL 34202 Contact: Jewell Micochero (941) 739-4358 FAX (941) 308-8123 DESIGN: Models SIGA-270, SIGA-270P, and SIGA-278 noncoded, intelligent manual pull stations. Unit consists of a listed pill station and a remote transponder. Refer to iistees data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations. INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical rating and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as manual pull stations for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control LAI lt. NOTE: Formerly 7150-1591:129 and 7150-1388:194 08-15-05 This listing is based upon-technical data submitted- by-the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does nut make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or . recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation S V' criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: JUNE 26, 2006 Listing Expires June 30, 2007 Authorized By: DIANE K. AREND, Senior Deputy Program Manager CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7300-1657:121 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: Misc. Devices/Control Unit Accessories LISTEE: GE Security, Inc., 8985 Town Center Parkway, Bradenton, FL 34202 Contact: Jewell Micochero (941) 739-4358 FAX (941) 308-8123 DESIGN: Models SlGA-CC1, SIGA-CC2, SIGA-CT1, SlGA-CT2, SIGA-CR, SIGA-CRR, SIGA-UM, SlGA-vlM 1. SIGA-WTM, SIGA-'f\/1, SIGA-MOM. SGA-i'1AS. SiGA-MOT2. GA-MCCi SIGA-MCC2, SIGA-MCR, SlGA-MCRR remote transponders. Models SlGA-AA30, SlGA-AA50 audio amplifier. Models SIGA-APS, SIGA-APS-220 power supply. Models SIGA-MB4, *slGAMp1 *SIGA.MP2 *SIGA..MP2L mounting plates; Models SIGA-U102R, SIGA-U106, SlGA-Ul06R motherboards. Model CS-SIGA-CC1P releasing module. Models SlGA-CC1S and SlGA-MCC1S Auto-Sync Output Modules. Models MFC-A and MFC-AD Enclosures. Refer to listee's data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational consideration. 0 RATING: 15.2-19.95VDC INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical rating, and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as control unit accessories for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. Refer to listee's Installation Instruction Manual for details. NOTE: Formerly 7300-1591:121 and 7300-1388:178 *Rev. 09-07-2005 - - o This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other-data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: JUNE 26, 2006 Listing Expires June 30, 2007 Authorized By: DIANE K. A REND, Senior Deputy Program Manager CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7125-1657:203 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: Fire Alarm Devices for the Hearing Impaired LISTEE: GE Security, Inc., 8985 Town Center Parkway, Bradenton, FL 34202 Contact: Jewell Micochero (941) 739-4358 FAX (941) 308-8123 DESIGN: Models 'EST" G1 single gang strobe light, followed by -R, F or none, followed by -V, followed by - 5. -30. -0. or -75, or -110. followed by -LG. The suffix F reFers to a sUk- screened word FIRE' on the strobe housing (not on the ens). Refer to listees data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations. RATING: Electrical: 24-30 VDC Candela: 15cd, 30cd, 60cd, 75cd, llOcd INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 0 MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical/candela rating and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as strobe lights for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. For indoor use and wall mount only. NOTE: Formerly 7125-1591:203 and 7125-1388:232 - -- 08-17-05 JEW This listing is based upon-technical data submitted-by the applicant.-CSFM Fire- Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data rndependent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: JUNE 26, 2006 Listing Expires June 30, 2007 Authorized By: DIANE K. AREND, Senior Deputy Program Manager CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7125-1657:202 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: Fire Alarm Devices for the Hearing Impaired LISTEE: GE Security, Inc., 8985 Town Center Parkway, Bradenton, FL 34202 Contact: Jewell Micochero (941) 739-4358 FAX (941) 308-8123 DESIGN: Models "EST" G1-HV15, -HV30, -HV60, -HV-75, G1-HOV15, -HOV30, -HOV60, -H0V75, -HOV110, GIF-HOV15, -HOV30, -HOV60, -H0V75, -HOV110, GlRF-HOV15, -HOV30, -HOV60, -H0V75, -HOV110, G1-HDVM, G1R-HDVM, Gi F-HDVM, Gi RF-HDVM, GC-HDVM, GC-HDVMH, GCF-HDVM, GCF-HDVMH, C1- HDV1575, 01 F.•H'V175 (31 cH!V d GIRF-I-4fl"1 hrn/strrbes with or without suffixes -m ana -i-. viou VVIfl NU OS Ui LiI LI i,UiLi UI U audible output version of the standard output model. Refer to listee's data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations. RATING: Electrical: 24-30 Vdc 1-33 Vdc/\/fwr - Models G1-HDVM, G1R-HDVM, G1F-HDVM, G1RF- HDVM, GC-HDVM, GC-HD\JMH, GCF-HDVM, GCF-HDVMH, Gi-H0V1575, Gi R-HDV1575, Gi F-HDV1S7S, Gi RF-HDV1575 Candela: 15cd, 30cd 60cd, 75cd, llOcd 15-95 multi-cd - Models GC-HDVM, GCF-HDVM 95-177 multi-cd-Models GC-HD\JMH, GCF-HDVMH 15/75cd -Models G1-HDV1575, G1R-HDV1575, 01 F-HD\11575, G1RF-HDV1575 INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical/candela rating, and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as horns and, horn/strobe lights for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. Suitable for use with Audible Signal Appliances (CSFM Listing No. 7135- 1657:230). For indoor use and wall mount only. Models GC-HDVM and GCF-HDVM for ceiling mount only. Refer to listee's Installation Instruction Manual for details. These units can generate a distinctive three-pulse Temporal Pattern Fire Alarm Evacuation Signal (for total evacuation) in accordance with NFPA 72, 1999 Edition. NOTE: Formerly 7125-1591:202 - - 08-17-05 - Thisiisting is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation S criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: JUNE 26, 2006 Listing Expires June 30, 2007 Authorized By: DIANE K. AREND, Senior Deputy Program Manager CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTIN G SERVICE LISTING No. 3240-1657:224 Page 1 cli CATEGORY: Duct Smoke Detector Housing/Base LISTEE: GE Security, Inc., 8985 Town Center Parkway, Bradenton, FL 34202 Contact: Jewell Micochero (941) 739-4358 FAX (941) 308-8123 DESIGN: Model SD-4WPCBJ printed wiring board sensor, replacement photoelectric type with RJ connector for Models TSD-SJ, ESD-SJ, TSD-SJG, TSD-SJCO2 (CSFM Listing No. 3242- 1657:223) duct smoke detectors. Model SD-4WPCBT printed wiring board sensor, replacement photoelectric type with terminal block connector for Models ISO-ST, ESD-ST, TSD-STCO2 (CSFM Listing No. 3242-1657:223) duct smoke detectors. Model SlGA-SDPCB printed wiring board sensor, replacement photoelectric type with terminal block connector for Model SIGA-SD (CSFM Listing No. 3242-1657:223) duct smoke detectors. *Model SD-2WPCB printed wiring board sensor, replacement photoelectric type terminal block connector for Models SD-2W and ESD-2W (CSFM Listing No. 3242-1657:223) duct smoke detector. Refer to the listee's data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instruction, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, Telaire name, model number, electrical rating, and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as printed wiring board sensors for use with separately listed duct smoke detectors and separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. Refer to listee's Installation Instruction Manual for details. NOTE: Formerly 3240-1591:224 Rev 3-07-2006 jew This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has -eviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: JUNE 26, 2006 Listing Expires June 30, 2007 Authorized By: DIANE K. A REND, Senior Deputy Program Manager CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 3240-1657:108 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: Duct Smoke Detector Housing/Base LISTEE: GE Security, Inc., 8985 Town Center Parkway, Bradenton, FL 34202 Contact: Jewell Micochero (941) 739-4358 FAX (941) 308-8123 DESIGN: Models 6260(1)100, 6265(1 )001I002, 2435P, 1235B, A19863, SIGA-DH, and 6260A-CU Duct Smoke Detector Units. Unit consists of a metal enclosure, relay, electrical components, a separately listed open area detector, a detector base and a sampling and exhaust tubes. Refer to listee's data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations. (1): First four digits followed by an alpha suffix. RATING: 300-4000 fpm except for Model 6260B-1 00 is range from 400-4000 fpm. Model SIGA-DH with Model SIGA-IPHS detector head, the sensitivity must be set at Levels 1 through 4 for velocities over 1000 fpm. INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and 0 ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, model number, rating and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as duct smoke detector housing units for use with separately listed compatible control units. Refer to listee's Installation Instruction Manual for details. NOTE: Formerly 3240-1591:108, 3240-1388:104, 3240-0073:141, 3242-0073:141, 3240- 0073:118 and 3241-0073:118 08-1 5-05KK This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. 0 Date Issued: JUNE 26, 2006 Listing Expires June 30, 2007 Authorized By: DIANE K. AREND, Senior Deputy Program Manager CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 3550-1501:137 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: Door Closer/Holders/Releasing Devices- LISTEE: Edwards Signaling, 90 Fieldstone Court, Cheshire, CT 06410 Contact: *Jewell Micochero (941) 739-4358 FAX (941) 739-4334 DESIGN: Models 1501, A1501, 1502, 1504, 1505, 1508, and 1509, door holders with or without suffixes AQ, N5, El, GI, E5, GT, D-GT or AQN5. Refer to listee's data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinanëes and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, model number, rating, and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as fire-rated door holders. When used on fire-rated doors an approved closer shall be used. Refer to listee's Installation Instruction Manual for details. 9 NOTE: Formerly 3550-1388:100, 3550-0073:040, 3550-0789:118, 3550-0999:101 *Rev. 06-24-2004 This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has:rviewd-théiest. result s. and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims This listing i's-not aft-endorsertfent-ar .., , recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements-or--installation- criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources-- Date Issued: JUNE 22, 2006 Listing Expires June 30, 2007 Authorized By: DIANE K. A REND, Senior Deputy Program Manager